Symmetricom GPS Receiver 58503B User Manual

097-58503-13  
Issue 2: Jul 00  
58503B  
GPS Time and Frequency  
Reference Receiver  
and  
59551A  
GPS Measurements  
Synchronization Module  
Operating and Programming  
Guide  
Copyright © 2000 Symmetricom, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in U.S.A.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
In This Guide  
1
Front and Rear Panels at a Glance  
58503B Front Panel at a Glance  
58503B/Option 001 Front-Panel Display/Keypad at a  
Glance  
2
3
58503B Rear Panel at a Glance  
59551A Front Panel at a Glance  
59551A Rear Panel at a Glance  
4
5
6
2
Serial Interface Capabilities  
Chapter Contents  
About the RS-232C Serial Port(s)  
PORT 1 Rear-Panel RS-232C Serial Port  
PORT 2 Front-Panel RS-232C Serial Port (59551A Only)  
Connecting a Computer or Modem  
To Connect the GPS Receiver to a PC or Modem Via the  
Rear-Panel PORT 1  
Connecting to the Personal Computer (PC)  
2
3
3
4
5
6
6
Connecting to a Modem  
6
Making Your Own Cables  
8
Configuring the RS-232C Port(s)  
9
Making Changes to the Serial Port Settings (If Needed) 10  
Configuring PORT 1 of the 59551A 10  
Configuring PORT 1 of the 58503B and PORT 2 of the  
59551A 10  
Determining the Serial Port Settings 11  
Standard 58503B and 59551A 11  
3
Visual User Interface  
Chapter Contents  
Using and Reading the Visual User Interface (the Receiver  
Status Screen)  
Tutorial on Using the Status Screen to Interface With the  
Receiver  
2
3
3
Demonstration of Holdover Operation  
8
Receiver Status Screen Data 11  
SYNCHRONIZATION Section of the Status Screen 12  
SYNCHRONIZATION Summary Line 12  
SmartClock Mode 12  
Operating and Programming Guide  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Reference Outputs 13  
ACQUISITION Section of the Status Screen 14  
ACQUISITION Line 14  
Tracking, Not Tracking 14  
Time 16  
Position 17  
HEALTH MONITOR Section of the Screen 18  
The Receiver Status Screen at a Glance 20  
4
Command Quick Reference  
Chapter Contents  
2
An Introduction to GPS Receiver Commands  
4
SCPI Conformance Information  
Command Syntax Conventions  
4
4
Command Presentation  
4
GPS Satellite Acquisition  
5
1 PPS Reference Synchronization  
7
Operating Status  
System Time 10  
8
Programmable Pulse Output (59551A Only) 11  
Event Time Stamping (59551A Only) 12  
Serial Interface Communication 13  
Receiver Initialization 14  
Receiver Identification/Upgrade 15  
Receiver Commands at a Glance 17  
Status Reporting System at a Glance 18  
5
Command Reference  
Chapter Contents  
Command Syntax Conventions  
Description Format  
2
4
5
Commands and Returns  
5
Query-Specific Information  
6
Description of Response Formats (ASCII-encoded)  
6
iv  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
GPS Satellite Acquisition  
7
1 PPS Reference Synchronization 27  
Operating Status 39  
System Time 73  
Programmable Pulse Output (59551A Only) 83  
Event Time Stamping (59551A Only) 89  
Serial Interface Communication 100  
Receiver Initialization 109  
Receiver Identification/Upgrade 113  
A
Error Messages  
Introduction  
2
Reading an Error  
2
Error Queue  
Error Types  
No Error  
3
4
4
Syntactic Error  
Semantic Error  
4
5
Hardware/Firmware Error  
Query Error  
General Error Behavior  
List of Errors  
5
5
6
7
B
Command Syntax and Style  
Appendix Contents  
2
Command Types, Format, and Elements  
3
Command Types  
3
Command Formats  
3
Common Command Format  
3
SCPI Command and Query Format  
3
Elements of SCPI Commands  
Common Command Syntax  
4
4
Subsystem Command Syntax  
Abbreviated Commands  
Keyword Separator  
4
5
5
Parameter Data Types  
Parameter Separator  
5
6
Query Parameters  
Suffixes  
6
6
Suffix Elements  
6
Suffix Multipliers  
7
Command Terminator  
7
Operating and Programming Guide  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Using Multiple Commands  
Program Messages  
Program Message Syntax  
Elements of Response Messages  
Response Messages  
7
7
7
9
9
Response Message Syntax  
Response Formats 10  
9
Reference Documentation 12  
C
D
Receiver Firmware Installation  
Downloading New Firmware Using SatStat Program  
Performance Tests  
2
Introduction  
Operational Verification  
Complete Performance Tests  
Test Record  
Equipment Required  
Before You Start  
Operational Verification  
Introduction  
Power-Up Procedure  
10 MHz Verification (58503B Only)  
1 PPS Verification  
IRIG-B Verification (59551A Only)  
Time of Day and PORT 1 RS-232C Serial Interface  
Verification  
Antenna Power Verification  
2
2
2
2
3
4
5
5
5
6
6
7
8
9
Front Panel Display/Keypad Verification (58503B Option 001  
Only) 10  
Time Tagging (Stamping) Verification and Programmable  
Verification (59551A Only) 11  
Programmable Pulse Verification (59551A Only) 13  
Operational Verification Conclusion 15  
In Case of Difficulty 16  
Complete Performance Tests 17  
Preliminary Test Setup 18  
Test 1: 10 MHz Frequency Accuracy and 1 PPS Jitter (Locked to  
GPS) 19  
Specifications Tested 19  
Procedure 19  
Test 2: 10 MHz Holdover Aging and 1 PPS Accumulated Time  
Error (Unlocked) 22  
vi  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Specifications Tested 22  
Procedure 22  
Test 3: 1 PPS Time Accuracy (Locked) 24  
Test 4: 10 MHz Frequency Stability (Time Domain) and Phase  
Noise (Frequency Domain) Measurements 24  
Frequency Stability (Time Domain) 24  
Phase Noise (Frequency Domain) 24  
58503B Performance Test Record 26  
59551A Performance Test Record  
27  
E
F
58503B Specifications  
Specifications and Characteristics  
2
GPS Receiver Features  
Other Information  
2
5
Options and Accessories  
5
59551A Specifications  
Specifications and Characteristics  
GPS Receiver Features  
Other Information  
Options and Accessories  
2
2
5
5
Command Index  
General Index  
Operating and Programming Guide  
vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
viii  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In This Guide  
Chapter 1, Front and Rear Panels at a Glance,” provides overview  
of the Receiver’s indicators, inputs, and outputs.  
Chapter 2, “Serial Interface Capabilities,” provides RS-232 serial  
interface port connection and configuration instructions.  
Chapter 3, “Visual User Interface,” which is subtitled “Using the  
Receiver Status Screen,” provides information on how to use the  
Receiver Status screen and the SatStat program. An illustrated foldout  
of the Receiver Status screen, which is a comprehensive summary of  
key operation conditions and settings, is provided at the end of this  
chapter.  
Chapter 4,“Command Quick Reference,” is a quick reference that  
summarizes the Receiver commands. The commands are presented or  
grouped by their functions. A foldout sheet that presents all of the  
commands on one side (Receiver Commands at a Glance) and  
illustrates the status reporting system on the other side (Status  
Reporting System at a Glance) is provided at the end of this chapter.  
Chapter 5, “Command Reference,” provides a description of each  
command that can be used to operate the GPS Receiver.  
The commands are grouped by functions. The functions are grouped  
and ordered the same as they are in Chapter 4, “Command Quick  
Reference,” and on the foldout “Receiver Commands at a Glance  
(cont’d).” A comprehensive discussion on how you can monitor and  
control alarm conditions using the status registers is also provided in  
this chapter.  
Appendix A, “Error Messages,” lists all error messages the Receiver  
could generate along with descriptions of possible causes for the errors.  
Appendix B, “Command Syntax and Style,” provides an overview of  
the Standard Commands for Programming Instrument (SCPI) syntax  
and style to help you program the Receiver.  
Appendix C, “Receiver Firmware Installation,” provides a  
procedure for downloading new firmware to the GPS Receiver.  
Appendix D, “Performance Tests,” provides procedures that verify  
the GPS Receivers operate properly and meet electrical performance  
specifications. Electrical performance is tested against the  
specifications listed in Appendix E, “58503B Specifications,” and  
Appendix F, “59551A Specifications,” in this guide.  
Operating and Programming Guide  
ix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In This Guide  
Appendix E, “58503B Specifications,” lists the product specifications  
and characteristics.  
Appendix F, “59551A Specifications,” lists the product specifications  
and characteristics.  
Command Index, lists all of the commands alphabetically and  
provides page references.  
General Index  
x
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
Front and Rear Panels at a Glance  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1 Front and Rear Panels at a Glance  
58503B Front Panel at a Glance  
58503B Front Panel at a Glance  
1 When the Power indicator  
illuminates, it indicates that the  
proper input power is supplied to the  
Receiver.  
3 When the Holdover indicator  
illuminates, it indicates that the  
Receiver is NOT locked to the GPS  
signal. The Receiver is keeping time  
based on the internal reference  
oscillator signal. The internal  
reference oscillator will determine  
the accuracy of the 1 PPS signal and  
the 10 MHz reference output.  
2 When the GPS Lock indicator  
illuminates, it indicates that the  
Receiver is receiving the GPS signal  
and is locked on one or more  
satellite(s).  
4 When the Alarm indicator  
illuminates, it indicates that the  
Receiver has detected an internal  
condition that requires attention.  
1-2  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1 Front and Rear Panels at a Glance  
58503B/Option 001 Front-Panel Display/Keypad at a Glance  
58503B/Option 001 Front-Panel  
Display/Keypad at a Glance  
1
2
An alphanumeric display for displaying time, position (i.e., longitude,  
latitude, and altitude), and Receiver status. The display is a highly visible  
twelve-character vacuum-fluorescent display.  
Status LED indicators:  
When the Power indicator is illuminated, it indicates that input power is  
supplied to the Receiver.  
When the GPS Lock indicator is illuminated, it indicates that the  
Receiver is tracking satellites and has phase-locked its internal reference  
to the reference provided by GPS.  
When the Holdover indicator is illuminated, it indicates that the Receiver  
is not phase-locking its internal reference to the reference provided by  
GPS. Typically, this would happen due to loss of satellite tracking.  
When the Alarm indicator is illuminated, it indicates that the Module has  
detected a condition that requires attention.  
3
Eight MODE keys with associated LEDs for front-panel access to time,  
position, and status information: Time, Long (longitude), Lat (latitude)  
Alt (altitude), Sat (number of satellites tracking), Status (Receiver or  
system status), and Serial Port (serial port settings). Each key selects a  
different display mode. Also, pressing Shift and Alt key in sequence clears  
instrument alarm.  
Operating and Programming Guide  
1-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1 Front and Rear Panels at a Glance  
58503B Rear Panel at a Glance  
58503B Rear Panel at a Glance  
1 ANT N-type (female) connector for  
Option 002 1 PP2S  
GPS Antenna connection.  
(One-Pulse-Per-Two-Seconds)  
connector for outputting a pulse  
every other second, synchronized to  
the even seconds in GPS time.  
Pulses occur on even-numbered  
seconds (i.e., 2 seconds, 4 seconds,  
etc.).  
2 PORT 1 RS-232C, DB-25 (female)  
serial interface port for remote  
control, monitoring, and  
downloading of the Receiver’s  
memory data and upgrading  
Receiver software.  
6 Alarm output for external devices  
(such as red light, bell, or horn) to  
indicate that the Receiver has  
detected an internal condition that  
requires attention.  
3 10 MHz OUT output for user-specific  
applications.  
4 1 PPS connector for outputting a  
continuous 1 Pulse Per Second  
signal.  
7 POWER input jack.  
1-4  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1 Front and Rear Panels at a Glance  
59551A Front Panel at a Glance  
59551A Front Panel at a Glance  
1 When the Power indicator  
illuminates, it indicates that the  
proper input power is supplied to  
the Module.  
4 When the Alarm indicator  
illuminates, it indicates that the  
Module has detected an internal  
condition that requires attention.  
2 When the GPS Lock indicator  
illuminates, it indicates that the  
Module is receiving the GPS signal  
and is locked on one or more  
satellite(s).  
5 PORT 2 RS-232C, DE-9S (female)  
serial interface port for local  
monitoring and retrieving data  
stored in the Module’s memory  
data.  
3 When the Holdover indicator  
illuminates, it indicates that the  
Module is NOT locked to the GPS  
signal. The Module is keeping time  
based on the internal reference  
oscillator signal. The internal  
reference oscillator will determine  
the accuracy of the 1 PPS signal.  
(See specification for Accuracy in  
Holdover in Appendix F, “59551A  
Specifications,” in this guide.)  
Operating and Programming Guide  
1-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1 Front and Rear Panels at a Glance  
59551A Rear Panel at a Glance  
59551A Rear Panel at a Glance  
1 1 PPS (One-Pulse-Per-Second)  
connector for outputting a  
continuous one pulse per second  
signal.  
5 Alarm BITE (Built-In Test  
Equipment) output for external  
devices (such as red light, bell, or  
horn) to indicate that the Module  
has detected an internal condition  
that requires attention. The relay  
opens and closes with the Alarm  
indicator. (Mating connector is  
Amphenol part number 31-224  
[glass-filled Noryl] or #31-2226  
[Telfon]).  
2 Programmable Pulse output connector  
for outputting pulses at user-specified  
time/period.  
3 IRIG-B output for outputting  
formatted time-code signals. (This  
signal is used for general purpose  
time distribution and magnetic  
tape annotation applications  
requiring the time of year.)  
6 ANTENNA N-type (female)  
connector for GPS antenna  
connection.  
4 Time tag input connectors for  
receiving TTL conditioned time  
tagging signals.  
7 PORT 1 RS-232C, DB-25 (female)  
serial interface port for remote  
control, monitoring, and retrieving  
of the Module’s memory data and  
upgrading Module software.  
8 AC POWER input jack. The AC  
input jack is standard. The unit  
operates from ac voltage. It can also  
be operated from dc voltage via this  
ac jack by using the supplied IEC  
320 dc connector plug.  
1-6  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
Serial Interface Capabilities  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2 Serial Interface Capabilities  
Chapter Contents  
Chapter Contents  
This chapter describes how to operate the 59551A GPS Measurements  
Synchronization Module and the 58503B GPS Time and Frequency  
Reference Receiver via the RS-232C serial interface port. Hardware  
connections and configuration are discussed.  
This chapter is organized as follows:  
• Configuring the RS-232C Port(s)  
page 2-9  
Making Changes to the Serial Port Settings  
(If Needed)  
page 2-10  
Determining the Serial Port Settings  
page 2-11  
2-2  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2 Serial Interface Capabilities  
About the RS-232C Serial Port(s)  
About the RS-232C Serial Port(s)  
The 58503B has only a rear-panel (PORT 1) RS-232C serial interface  
port.  
The 59551A has separate rear-panel (PORT 1) and front-panel  
(PORT 2) RS-232C serial interface ports.  
The rear-panel (PORT 1) RS-232C serial interface port is the only port  
which can be used to upgrade the Receiver firmware; therefore, it is  
referred to as the PRIMARY port. The 59551A’s front-panel (PORT 2)  
RS-232C serial interface port is referred to as the SECONDARY port  
because it cannot be used to upgrade the Receiver firmware. The  
operation and configuration of these ports are described in the  
following paragraphs. More information is provided in the sections  
titled “Connecting a Computer or Modem” and “Configuring the  
RS-232C Port(s)” in this chapter on page 2-5 and page 2-9,  
respectively.  
Either port allows you full communication with the Receiver. This can  
be done by connecting any computer with an RS-232C serial interface  
and suitable terminal emulation software, then sending the correct  
commands for transmitting or retrieving data.  
PORT 1 Rear-Panel RS-232C Serial Port  
This 25-pin female subminiature D (DB-25) connector (PORT 1)  
RS-232C Serial Interface Port is located on the rear panel.  
The pins used for PORT 1 RS-232C communication are described in  
NOTE  
We reserve the right to impose signals on other pins; therefore, your  
connection should be restricted to the pins described in Table 2-1.  
Table 2-1. PORT 1 Rear-Panel RS-232C Serial Port Connections  
*Pin  
Input/Output  
Description  
Number  
2
3
7
Output  
Transmit Data (TxD). GPS Receiver output.  
Receive Data (RxD). GPS Receiver input.  
Signal Ground (SG)  
Input  
_____  
Operating and Programming Guide  
2-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 2 Serial Interface Capabilities  
About the RS-232C Serial Port(s)  
Refer to the sections titled “Connecting a Computer or Modem” in this  
chapter, on page 2-5, for wiring diagrams and more information on the  
RS-232C interface cables.  
PORT 2 Front-Panel RS-232C Serial Port  
(59551A Only)  
This 9-pin female subminiature D (DB-9) connector (PORT 2) RS-232C  
Serial Interface Port is located on the front panel.  
The pins used for PORT 2 RS-232C communication are described in  
NOTE  
We reserves the right to impose signals on other pins; therefore, your  
connection should be restricted to the pins described in Table 2-2.  
Table 2-2. PORT 2 Front-Panel RS-232C Serial Port Connections  
(59551A Only)  
*Pin  
Input/Output  
Description  
Number  
2
3
5
Input  
Receive Data (RxD). GPS Receiver input.  
Transmit Data (TxD). GPS Receiver output.  
Signal Ground (SG)  
Output  
_____  
Refer to the sections titled “Connecting a Computer or Modem” in this  
chapter, on page 2-5, for wiring diagrams and more information on the  
RS-232C interface cables.  
2-4  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 2 Serial Interface Capabilities  
Connecting a Computer or Modem  
Connecting a Computer or Modem  
To connect the GPS Receiver to a computer or modem, you must have  
the proper interface cable. Most computers are DTE (Data Terminal  
Equipment) devices. Since the Receiver is also a DTE device, you must  
use a DTE-to-DTE interface cable when connecting to a computer.  
These cables are also called “null-modem”, “modem-eliminator”, or  
“crossover” cables.  
Most modems are DCE (Digital Communication Equipment) devices;  
thus, you must use a DTE-to-DCE interface cable.  
The interface cable must also have the proper connector on each end  
and the internal wiring must be correct. Connectors typically have  
9 pins (DE-9 connector) or 25 pins (DB-25 connector) with a “male” or  
“female” pin configuration. A male connector has pins inside the  
connector shell and a female connector has holes inside the connector  
shell.  
To simplify interface cable selections, the following sections  
tells you which cables to use.  
Operating and Programming Guide  
2-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 2 Serial Interface Capabilities  
Connecting a Computer or Modem  
To Connect the GPS Receiver to a PC or Modem Via  
the Rear-Panel PORT 1  
Connecting to the Personal Computer (PC)  
Use an HP 24542G interface cable or equivalent to connect the  
Receiver’s rear-panel PORT 1 DB-25 female connector to a PC as  
shown in Figure 2-1. See “Making Your Own Cables” starting on  
page 2-8.  
GPS Receiver  
(Rear view)  
Computer  
WARNING: NO OPERATOR SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE, REFER SERVICING TO SERVICE TRAINED PERSONNEL.  
OUTPUTS  
pps Programmable Irig-B  
TOD  
INPUTS  
ALARM BITE  
ANTENNA  
1
Time Tag Time Tag Time Tag  
1
2
3
!
POWER  
129 VDC  
48 VDC  
!
!
FOR LABORATORY USE BY  
QUALIFIED PERSONNEL  
FOUR USAGE EN LABORATOIRE  
PAR PERSONNEL QUALIFIE  
Port  
1
129 VDC  
SERIAL PLATE  
!
WARNING: FOR CONTINUED FIRE PROTECTION, USE SPECIFIED  
LINE FUSE.  
~
HP 24542G  
or equivalent  
Figure 2-1. Connecting the GPS Receiver to a PC or Laptop  
Connecting to a Modem  
Use an HP 40242M interface cable or equivalent to connect the  
Receiver’s rear-panel PORT 1 DB-25 female connector to a modem,  
which is a DCE (Digital Communication Equipment) device, as shown  
in Figure 2-2. See “Making Your Own Cables” starting on page 2-8.  
2-6  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 2 Serial Interface Capabilities  
Connecting a Computer or Modem  
GPS Receiver  
(Rear view)  
WARNING: NO OPERATOR SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE, REFER SERVICING TO SERVICE TRAINED PERSONNEL.  
OUTPUTS  
pps Programmable Irig-B  
TOD  
INPUTS  
ALARM BITE  
ANTENNA  
1
Time Tag Time Tag Time Tag  
1
2
3
!
POWER  
129 VDC  
48 VDC  
!
!
FOR LABORATORY USE BY  
QUALIFIED PERSONNEL  
FOUR USAGE EN LABORATOIRE  
PAR PERSONNEL QUALIFIE  
Port  
1
129 VDC  
SERIAL PLATE  
!
WARNING: FOR CONTINUED FIRE PROTECTION, USE SPECIFIED  
LINE FUSE.  
~
Modem set to  
Auto-Answer  
Telephone  
Line  
HP 40242M  
or equivalent  
Figure 2-2 Connecting the GPS Receiver to a Modem  
Operating and Programming Guide  
2-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2 Serial Interface Capabilities  
Connecting a Computer or Modem  
Making Your Own Cables  
If you choose to make your own cable, see Figure Figure 2-3 and  
Figure Figure 2-3 illustrates how to make a DE-9S-to-DE-9P, DTE-  
to-DCE interface cable that can replace the cable and adapter  
combination of the HP 24542U cable and the HP 5181-6639 adapter for  
use with PORT 2 of the 59551A.  
Data  
Terminal  
Data  
Communications  
Equipment  
Equipment  
59551A PORT 2  
RS-232C (9-pin)  
DE-9S-to-DE-9P  
(DTE-to-DCE) Interface Cable  
PC  
RS-232C (9-pin)  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
Instrument input  
Instrument output  
PC input  
PC output  
RX  
TX  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
RX  
TX  
GND  
GND  
DE-9P  
Male  
DE-9S  
Female  
DE-9P DE-9S  
Male Female  
Figure 2-3 DE-9S-to-DE-9P (DTE-to-DCE) Serial Interface Connection  
to PORT 2  
Figure Figure 2-4 illustrates how to make a DE-9S-to-DB-25P,  
DTE-to-DTE interface cable that can replace the HP 24542G cable  
(25-pin male to 9-pin female connectors) for use with PORT 1.  
Data  
Terminal  
Data  
DE-9S-to-DB-25P  
(DTE-to-DTE)  
Interface cable  
Terminal  
Equipment  
Equipment  
PORT 1  
RS-232C (25-pin)  
PC  
RS-232C (9-pin)  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
Instrument output  
Instrument input  
PC input  
PC output  
RX  
TX  
TX  
RX  
3
4
GND  
5
6
7
GND  
8
20  
22  
DE-9P DE-9S  
Male Female  
DB-25P  
Male  
DB-25S  
Female  
Figure 2-4 DE-9S-to-DB-25P (DTE-to-DTE) Serial Interface  
Connection to PORT 1  
2-8  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 2 Serial Interface Capabilities  
Configuring the RS-232C Port(s)  
Configuring the RS-232C Port(s)  
The 59551A has separate rear-panel (PORT 1) and front-panel  
(PORT 2) RS-232C serial interface ports.  
The 58503B has one RS-232C serial interface port (PORT 1) on the  
rear panel. Note: PORT 1 of the 58503B and PORT 2 of the 59551A  
have the same configuration capabilities as indicated in Table 2-4.  
Software pacing, baud rate, parity, data bits, and stop bits parameters  
for each port are user-selectable and independent of the configuration  
of the other.  
Table 2-3 and Table 2-4 list the configuration factory-default values for  
PORT 1 and PORT 2.  
Table 2-3. Factory-Default Values for PORT 1 of the 59551A  
Parameter  
Default  
Possible Choices  
XON or NONE  
1200, 2400, 9600, or 19200  
EVEN, ODD, or NONE  
7 or 8  
Software Pacing NONE  
Baud Rate  
Parity  
9600  
NONE  
8
Data Bits  
Stop Bits  
Full Duplex  
1
1 or 2  
ON  
ON or OFF  
Table 2-4. Factory-Default Values for PORT 1 or the 58503B and  
PORT 2 of the 59551A  
Parameter  
Default  
Possible Choices  
Software Pacing NONE  
XON or NONE  
Baud Rate  
Parity  
9600  
NONE  
8
1200, 2400, 9600, or 19200  
EVEN, ODD, or NONE  
Data Bits  
Fixed at 7 when parity is even or odd.  
Fixed at 8 when parity is none.  
Stop Bits  
1
Fixed (no choices available)  
ON or OFF  
Full Duplex  
ON  
Procedures for configuring the RS-232C ports are provided in the  
following paragraphs.  
Operating and Programming Guide  
2-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 2 Serial Interface Capabilities  
Configuring the RS-232C Port(s)  
Making Changes to the Serial Port Settings  
(If Needed)  
CAUTION  
If you change the serial port settings, your changes will be  
stored in the Receiver. Cycling power will not reset to factory  
defaults. Therefore, if you make a change, it is recommended  
that you record the settings and keep the record with the  
Receiver.  
If you need to change the serial port settings, for example, to set  
up for a different computer, use the guidelines given in this  
section.  
Serial port settings are changed by issuing commands.  
It is recommended that you issue a single compound command which  
simultaneously sets all the serial port parameters. Then connect the  
other computer and begin using the instrument with the new settings.  
NOTE  
If you choose to set parameters one at a time, you will make the  
procedure more difficult. That is, with each change, the instrument  
will be updated, but your computer will retain its original settings.  
At each step, you will have stopped serial communications and be  
forced to modify your PC settings to match the Receiver in order to  
continue. It is recommended that you make all changes in a single  
compound command, verify the changes, and record all parameters.  
Configuring PORT 1 of the 59551A  
Complete configuration of PORT 1 of the 59551A requires that you set  
five parameters. The command line sent in the following example  
would set the RS-232C port pacing to XON, baud rate to 2400, parity to  
EVEN, data bits to 7, and stop bits to 2. This command line must be  
transmitted on PORT 1.  
SYST:COMM:SER:PACE XON; BAUD 2400; PARITY EVEN; BITS 7; SBITS 2  
Configuring PORT 1 of the 58503B and PORT 2 of the  
59551A  
Complete configuration of PORT 1 (58503B) and PORT 2 (59551A)  
require that you set three parameters. The command line sent in the  
following example would set the RS-232C port pacing to XON, baud  
rate to 2400, and parity to EVEN. This command line must be  
transmitted on PORT 1 or PORT 2.  
SYST:COMM:SER2:PACE XON; BAUD 2400; PARITY EVEN  
2-10  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2 Serial Interface Capabilities  
Configuring the RS-232C Port(s)  
Determining the Serial Port Settings  
Standard 58503B and 59551A  
If you connect your PC, press Return, and do not get a scpi> prompt  
back from the Receiver, your Receiver’s serial communication settings  
may have been modified. You need to systematically step through the  
data communication settings on your PC until your PC matches the  
Receiver. The Receiver cannot communicate its settings until this  
process is complete.  
Iterate until you are able to verify that settings on your PC match the  
Receiver.  
When you are successful, you will have restored full RS-232C  
communications, enabling you to query the Receiver’s communication  
settings. Once you establish communications with one serial port, you  
can query the Receiver for settings of either port.  
Issue the following queries to either serial port to verify PORT 1’s  
configuration.  
SYST:COMM:SER:PACE?  
SYST:COMM:SER:BAUD?  
SYST:COMM:SER:PARITY?  
SYST:COMM:SER:BITS?  
SYST:COMM:SER:SBITS?  
Issue the following queries to either serial port to verify PORT 2’s  
configuration.  
SYST:COMM:SER2:PACE?  
SYST:COMM:SER2:BAUD?  
SYST:COMM:SER2:PARITY?  
SYST:COMM:SER2:BITS?  
SYST:COMM:SER2:SBITS?  
Operating and Programming Guide  
2-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2 Serial Interface Capabilities  
Configuring the RS-232C Port(s)  
This page intentionally left blank.  
2-12  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Visual User Interface  
Using the Receiver Status Screen  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 Visual User Interface  
Chapter Contents  
Chapter Contents  
This chapter provides a tutorial section on how to use the Receiver  
Status Screen, a comprehensive reference information section, and an  
illustrated foldout of the Receiver Status Screen, which is a  
comprehensive summary of key operation conditions and settings.  
This chapter is organized as follows:  
• Using and Reading the Visual User Interface (the  
Receiver Status Screen)  
page 3-3  
– Tutorial on Using the Status Screen to Interface With  
the Receiver  
page 3-3  
– Demonstration of Holdover Operation  
• Receiver Status Screen Data  
page 3-8  
page 3-11  
page 3-12  
page 3-14  
page 3-18  
page 3-20  
– SYNCHRONIZATION Section of the Status Screen  
– ACQUISITION Section of the Status Screen  
– HEALTH MONITOR Section of the Screen  
• The Receiver Status Screen at a Glance (foldout)  
3-2  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 Visual User Interface  
Using and Reading the Visual User Interface (the Receiver Status  
Screen)  
Using and Reading the Visual User  
Interface (the Receiver Status Screen)  
The combination of the PC and the GPS Receiver yields a visual user  
interface called the Receiver Status Screen that lets you see what the  
Receiver is doing and how it is progressing towards tracking satellites  
to eventually lock to the GPS signal.  
When connected to a properly configured PC, the Receiver Status  
Screen can be accessed. There are two ways to access and use the  
Receiver Status Screen:  
• By installing a commercially available terminal emulation  
program, connecting the Receiver to a PC via the PORT 1 port, and  
manually sending the :SYSTEM:STATUS? query. (Refer to Chapter 1,  
“Getting Started,” in 58503B/59551A Getting Started Guide.)  
• By installing and operating the SatStat program, which  
automatically generates continual status screen updates, and  
connecting the Receiver to a PC via PORT 1. (Refer to the sections  
titled “Installing the Automated SatStat Program for Continual  
Status Updates” and “Operating the Automated SatStat Program”  
in Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” of the 58503B/59551A Getting  
Started Guide for details on installation and operation.)  
The following tutorial demonstrates how you can use the Receiver  
Status Screen to observe Receiver operation. The tutorial uses the  
manual (:SYSTEM:STATUS?) method.  
Tutorial on Using the Status Screen to Interface With  
the Receiver  
Type :SYSTEM:STATUS? at the scpi> prompt.  
An initial power-up screen is displayed, which is similar to the  
demonstration screen shown in Figure 3-1. The first data that you  
should look at is in the SYNCHRONIZATION area of the screen. It is  
telling you that it is in the Power-up state as indicated by the >>  
marker. That is, the Receiver has just been put on line.  
Operating and Programming Guide  
3-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 Visual User Interface  
Using and Reading the Visual User Interface (the Receiver Status  
Screen)  
Receiver Status  
----------------------------  
----------------------------  
SYNCHRONIZATION.........................................  
[
Outputs Invalid  
Reference Outputs  
TFOM  
]
SmartClock Mode  
Locked  
Recovery  
9
FFOM  
3
1PPS TI --  
Holdover  
Power-up:GPS acquisition  
HOLD THR 1.000 us  
Holdover Uncertainty  
Predict --  
>>  
.............................................[GPS 1PPS Invalid]  
Not Tracking: 6  
ACQUISITION  
Tracking: 0  
Time  
UTC  
PRN El Az  
*1 -- ---  
*6 -- ---  
*9 -- ---  
*14 -- ---  
*22 -- ---  
*24 -- ---  
12:00:00[?]01 Jan 1996  
GPS 1PPS Invalid: not tracking  
ANT DLY 0 ns  
Position  
MODE  
Survey: 0% complete  
Suspended:track <4 sats  
INIT LAT N 0:00:00.000  
INIT LON W 0:00:00.000  
INIT HGT  
0 m (GPS)  
[ OK ]  
ELEV MASK 10 deg  
HEALTH MONITOR  
Self Test: OK Int Pwr: OK Oven Pwr: OK  
*attempting to track  
......................................................  
OCXO: OK EFC: OK GPS Rcv: OK  
Figure 3-1. Receiver Status Screen at Powerup  
The ACQUISITION area of the screen is telling you that no satellites  
have been tracked. The identification numbers of several satellites  
appear in the Not Tracking column. The asterisk next to the satellite  
identification number, or pseudorandom noise code (PRN), indicates  
the Receiver is attempting to track it.  
The current time and date are shown in the Time quadrant of the  
ACQUISITION area. The default power-up setting, indicated by [?], is  
corrected when the first satellite is tracked. Since the Receiver is not  
tracking any satellites, the GPS 1 PPS reference signal is invalid.  
An accurate position is necessary to derive precise time from GPS. The  
Position quadrant indicates that the Receiver is in survey mode, which  
uses GPS to determine the position of the GPS antenna. This process  
has not yet started, since position calculations can be performed only  
while tracking four or more satellites. INIT LAT, INIT LON, and INIT  
HGT are the initial estimate of the true position. These coordinates are  
refined by the survey process. The Receiver uses this position and the  
time-of-day to select satellites to track. Therefore, you can reduce  
satellite acquisition time by specifying a close approximation of  
position and time.  
Now, let’s send the :SYSTEM:STATUS? query again to see what kind of  
progress the Receiver has made.  
3-4  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 Visual User Interface  
Using and Reading the Visual User Interface (the Receiver Status  
Screen)  
You can now see that the Receiver is tracking several satellites as  
shown in Figure 3-2. The process of acquiring and tracking satellites is  
described in the following paragraphs.  
Receiver Status  
----------------------------  
----------------------------  
Outputs Valid/Reduced Accuracy  
Reference Outputs  
TFOM  
SYNCHRONIZATION...........................  
SmartClock Mode  
>>Locked to GPS: stabilizing frequency  
[
]
6
FFOM  
1
Recovery  
Holdover  
Power-up  
1PPS TI +71 ns relative to GPS  
HOLD THR 1.000 us  
Holdover Uncertainty  
Predict --  
...............................................[GPS 1PPS Valid]  
Not Tracking: 4  
ACQUISITION  
Tracking: 5  
Time  
UTC  
PRN El Az C/N PRN El Az  
2 70 337 49  
7 46 188 48 16 24 243  
15 33 82 38 *26 Acq..  
19 28 113 36 31 -- ---  
22 65 91 49  
17:56:44 31 Jan 1996  
GPS 1PPS Synchronized to UTC  
9 11 292  
ANT DLY 0 ns  
Position  
MODE  
Survey: 1.2%  
complete  
AVG LAT N 37:19:34.746  
AVG LON W 121:59:50.502  
AVG HGT  
+34.14 m (GPS)  
[ OK ]  
OCXO: OK EFC: OK GPS Rcv: OK  
*attempting to track  
HEALTH MONITOR  
Self Test: OK Int Pwr: OK Oven Pwr: OK  
ELEV MASK 10 deg  
......................................................  
Figure 3-2. Receiver Status Screen Displaying Initial Satellite  
Acquisition  
An asterisk (*) next to the PRN of a satellite in the Not Tracking  
column indicates the Receiver is attempting to track it. The elevation  
(El) and azimuth (Az) angles of the satellite are indicated. Acq . or  
Acq .. tell you that the Receiver is attempting to track that satellite.  
One dot after the Acq indicator shows that the Receiver is attempting  
to acquire its signal, and two dots indicate impending lock. Eventually,  
you will see the satellite move to the Tracking column, which shows  
the satellite PRN, the elevation angle of the satellite in the sky (90°  
being zenith), the azimuth angle (number of degrees bearing from true  
north), and the carrier-to-noise ratio (C/N). A good carrier-to-noise  
ratio is a number above 35, which would be efficient for the Receiver to  
operate. Numbers below 35, suggest intermittent tracking of the  
satellite or no tracking; check your antenna system should this be the  
case.  
As indicated by the demonstration screen in Figure 3-2, the Receiver is  
now surveying for position. It is tracking four satellites which is the  
minimum number that must be tracked to determine postion. As you  
can see, the Position MODE line indicates survey is 1.2% complete. A  
complete survey would take two hours during which four satellites or  
more are continuously tracked.  
Operating and Programming Guide  
3-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 Visual User Interface  
Using and Reading the Visual User Interface (the Receiver Status  
Screen)  
Also, you can see the initial (estimated) position has been replaced  
with a computed position, which the Receiver continuous to refine until  
it gets a very accurate position. The status screen indicates that a  
computed position is being used by displaying the averaged latitude,  
and longitude height (AVG LAT, AVG LON, and AVG HGT).  
If the position were not precise, GPS timing information would be  
inaccurate by an amount corresponding to the error in the computed  
position. An error in the computed position of the antenna translates  
into an error in the derived time and will compromise the Receiver’s  
ability to be a timing source.  
Let’s consider a case where four satellites are not visible at powerup  
because of a poor antenna location, such as an “urban canyon” (located  
between tall city buildings). If accurate position is known from a  
Geodetic survey of that site, it can be programmed with the position  
command, thereby bypassing the survey operation. This is useful when  
four satellites cannot be tracked for an extended period of time.  
Let’s send the :SYSTEM:STATUS? query again to observe the current  
status of the Receiver.  
The updated demonstration status screen in Figure 3-3 indicates that  
the position survey is now 5.4% complete. Thus, the survey task is  
beginning to iterate toward an accurate position. In the Time  
quadrant, the UTC time is now correct. The date is correct, and the  
GPS reference signal is synchronized to UTC.  
3-6  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 Visual User Interface  
Using and Reading the Visual User Interface (the Receiver Status  
Screen)  
Receiver Status  
----------------------------  
----------------------------  
Outputs Valid/Reduced Accuracy  
Reference Outputs  
TFOM  
SYNCHRONIZATION............................  
SmartClock Mode  
>>Locked to GPS: stabilizing frequency  
[
]
4
FFOM  
1
Recovery  
Holdover  
Power-up  
1PPS TI +20 ns relative to GPS  
HOLD THR 1.000 us  
Holdrover Uncertainty  
Predict 432.0 us/initial 24 hrs  
...............................................[GPS 1PPS Valid]  
Not Tracking: 1  
ACQUISITION  
Tracking: 6  
PRN El Az C/N PRN El Az  
2 70 301 40 16 13 258  
7 35 186 38  
19 40 102 38  
22 71 60 39  
26 19 317 36  
31 16 41 35  
Time  
UTC  
18:47:07 31 Jan 1996  
GPS 1PPS Synchronized to UTC  
ANT DLY 0 ns  
Position  
MODE  
Survey: 5.4%  
complete  
AVG LAT N 37:19:34.937  
AVG LON W 121:59:50.457  
AVG HGT  
+67.94 m (GPS)  
[ OK ]  
OCXO: OK EFC: OK GPS Rcv: OK  
ELEV MASK 10 deg  
HEALTH MONITOR  
Self Test: OK Int Pwr: OK Oven Pwr: OK  
......................................................  
Figure 3-3. Receiver Status Screen Displaying Progress Towards  
Steady-State Operation  
In the SYNCHRONIZATION area, the >> marker is pointed at the  
Locked to GPS line, indicating that the Receiver is locked to GPS and  
stabilizing the frequency of its oscillator. This means that the Receiver  
has phase-locked its oscillator to the 1 PPS reference signal provided  
by GPS, but it is not at its final, or most stable, state. The Receiver is  
locked and the front-panel GPS Lock LED is illuminated.  
For users without the command interface (PC/Terminal emulator  
connected to the Receiver), the illuminated GPS Lock LED is probably  
the first indication that after powerup that the Receiver is moving  
towards a stable state.  
With the command interface and status screen, you can get more  
detailed information. For example, you can read the reference outputs  
quality indicators in the Reference Outputs area of the status screen.  
These are the Time Figure of Merit (TFOM) and Frequency Figure of  
Merit (FFOM) indicators. As shown in Figure 3-3, the TFOM is 4 and  
the FFOM is 1. These values will eventually decrease towards the  
ultimate values that represent steady-state performance. Refer to the  
subsection titled ““Reference Outputs” on page 3-13 in this chapter for  
more information about TFOM and FFOM.  
Operating and Programming Guide  
3-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 Visual User Interface  
Using and Reading the Visual User Interface (the Receiver Status  
Screen)  
Also indicated is a prediction of the accuracy of the Receiver should it  
go into holdover operation.  
Demonstration of Holdover Operation  
CAUTION  
The Receiver typically reaches stable state 24 to 72 hours after  
powerup, and it will learn best if its experiences no holdover in the first  
24 hours. Therefore, the holdover demonstration in the following  
paragraphs will compromise the Receiver’s ability to learn the  
characteristics of its internal reference oscillator. For the purpose of  
education only, you will be shown how to initiate a holdover.  
A user should never initiate holdover during the first 24 hours while  
the Receiver is learning its internal oscillator characteristics. The  
Receiver should maintain GPS lock during this time because it is using  
the GPS signal to discipline the oscillator. It will learn what the  
oscillator drift characteristics are relative to the GPS signal. It will  
learn how the oscillator ages, and the software will learn how to  
compensate for that aging.  
Thus, it is recommended that the Receiver is always kept locked to  
GPS during the first 24 hours.  
For demonstration purposes, and since the Receiver has been powered  
up for a while, let’s put the Receiver into holdover by simply removing  
the antenna connection. (Note that holdover also can be manually  
initiated by sending the SYNCHRONIZATION:HOLDOVER:INITIATE  
command; however, for this demonstration, disconnect the antenna  
cable.) The following will occur after a verification delay:  
• The front-panel Holdover LED will illuminate, and  
• after sending the :SYSTEM:STATUS? query again, a screen similar to  
Figure 3-4 should appear.  
Let’s send the :SYSTEM:STATUS? query. Figure 3-4 should appear.  
3-8  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 Visual User Interface  
Using and Reading the Visual User Interface (the Receiver Status  
Screen)  
Receiver Status  
----------------------------  
SYNCHRONIZATION...........................  
----------------------------  
[
Outputs Valid/Reduced Accuracy  
Reference Outputs  
TFOM  
]
SmartClock Mode  
Locked to GPS  
Recovery  
3
FFOM  
2
1PPS TI --  
HOLD THR 1.000 us  
Holdover Uncertainty  
>>Holdover: GPS 1PPS invalid  
Power-up  
Predict 432.0 us/initial 24 hrs  
Holdover Duration: 0m 14s Present 1.0 us  
.............................................[GPS 1PPS Invalid]  
Not Tracking: 7  
ACQUISITION  
Tracking: 0  
Time  
UTC  
PRN El Az PRN El Az  
*2 71 316 *31 12 29  
*7 41 186  
20:56:14 31 Jan 1996  
GPS 1PPS Inaccurate: not tracking  
ANT DLY 0 ns  
Position  
15 11 86  
*19 35 107  
*22 68 78  
*26 23 314  
MODE  
Survey: 71.1% complete  
LAT  
LON  
HGT  
N 37:19:32.472  
W 121:59:51.784  
+42.19 m (GPS)  
ELEV MASK 10 deg *attempting to track  
HEALTH MONITOR  
Self Test: OK Int Pwr: OK Oven Pwr: OK  
[ OK ]  
......................................................  
OCXO: OK EFC: OK GPS Rcv: OK  
Figure 3-4. Receiver Status Screen Displaying Holdover Operation  
In the SYNCHRONIZATION area, you can see that the Receiver has  
gone into holdover as indicated by >> marker that is pointing at the  
Holdover line. The status screen indicates that the reason the Receiver  
is in holdover is because the GPS 1 PPS reference signal is invalid.  
You would expect this since the antenna has been disconnected.  
The status screen shows loss of the GPS signal. As you can see on the  
screen, all of the satellites in the Tracking column moved into the Not  
Tracking column.  
The status screen in Figure 3-4 shows that the Receiver has been in  
holdover operation for 14 seconds.  
If the Receiver SmartClock had had enough time to learn the internal  
oscillator characteristics, the Receiver Status Screen would show that  
the Receiver went into holdover, and the Receiver’s outputs were  
maintained during holdover by the SmartClock.  
Operating and Programming Guide  
3-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 Visual User Interface  
Using and Reading the Visual User Interface (the Receiver Status  
Screen)  
When the GPS antenna is re-connected and the GPS signal has been  
re-acquired, the Receiver has the ability to recover from holdover by  
itself. The SYNCHRONIZATION area of the screen will show the >>  
marker pointing at the Recovery line (and then eventually at the  
Locked to GPS line), the GPS Lock LED will illuminate, and the screen  
will look similar toFigure 3-5.  
Receiver Status  
----------------------------  
----------------------------  
Outputs Valid/Reduced Accuracy  
Reference Outputs  
TFOM  
SYNCHRONIZATION............................  
SmartClock Mode  
>>Locked to GPS: Stabilizing frequency  
[
]
3
FFOM  
1
Recovery  
Holdover  
Power-up  
1PPS TI +10.6 ns relative to GPS  
HOLD THR 1.000 us  
Holdover Uncertainty  
Predict 432.0 us/initial 24 hrs  
...............................................[GPS 1PPS Valid]  
Not Tracking: 0  
ACQUISITION  
Tracking: 6  
PRN El Az C/N  
2 71 317 40  
7 34 185 38  
19 41 101 37  
22 67 80 40  
26 24 312 37  
31 12 27 36  
Time  
UTC  
20:59:28 31 Jan 1996  
GPS 1PPS Synchronized to UTC  
ANT DLY 0 ns  
Position  
MODE  
Survey: 71.4% complete  
LAT  
LON  
HGT  
N 37:19:32.486  
W 121:59:52.082  
+40.06 m (GPS)  
ELEV MASK 10 deg  
[ OK ]  
......................................................  
HEALTH MONITOR  
Self Test: OK Int Pwr: OK Oven Pwr: OK  
OCXO: OK EFC: OK GPS Rcv: OK  
Figure 3-5. Receiver Status Screen Following Recovery from  
Holdover Operation  
You can see the Receiver has recovered from holdover almost  
immediately and it has returned to locked operation.  
3-10  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 Visual User Interface  
Receiver Status Screen Data  
Receiver Status Screen Data  
This section defines the data displayed in the Receiver Status Screen,  
shown in Figure 3-6.  
Receiver Status  
----------------------------  
----------------------------  
Outputs Valid  
SYNCHRONIZATION..........................................  
[
Reference Outputs  
]
SmartClock Mode  
>>  
Locked to GPS  
TFOM  
3
FFOM  
0
Recovery  
Holdover  
Power-up  
1PPS TI +7.2 ns relative to GPS  
HOLD THR 1.000 us  
Holdover Uncertainty  
Predict 49.0 us/initial 24 hrs  
................................................[GPS 1PPS Valid]  
Not Tracking: 1  
ACQUISITION  
Tracking: 6  
PRN El Az C/N PRN El Az  
Time  
UTC  
+1 leap second pending  
23:59:59 31 Dec 1995  
2 49 243 49  
16 24 282 46  
18 38 154 47  
19 65 52 49  
27 62 327 49  
31 34 61 47  
14 11 82  
GPS 1PPS Synchronized to UTC  
ANT DLY 120 ns  
Position  
MODE  
Survey: 17.5% complete  
AVG LAT N 37:19:32.264  
AVG LON W 121:59:52.112  
AVG HGT  
......................................................  
+41.86 m (GPS)  
[ OK ]  
ELEV MASK 10 deg  
HEALTH MONITOR  
Self Test: OK Int Pwr: OK Oven Pwr: OK  
OCXO: OK EFC: OK GPS Rcv: OK  
Figure 3-6. Sample Status Screen  
The status screen has three major sections:  
• SYNCHRONIZATION  
• ACQUISITION  
• HEALTH MONITOR  
The SYNCHRONIZATION section of the status screen shows how the  
GPS Receiver’s SmartClocktechnology is progressing towards its  
objective, which is to synchronize the Receiver’s oscillator to the 1 PPS  
reference signal produced by the Receiver’s internal GPS Engine.  
The ACQUISITION section of the status screen shows how the  
Receiver’s internal GPS Engine is progressing towards its objective,  
which is to produce an accurate internal 1 PPS reference signal. It does  
so through tracking GPS satellites.  
The HEALTH MONITOR section of the status screen summarizes the  
overall health of the product.  
Operating and Programming Guide  
3-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 Visual User Interface  
Receiver Status Screen Data  
SYNCHRONIZATION Section of the Status Screen  
SYNCHRONIZATION Summary Line  
The SYNCHRONIZATION line in the screen summarizes the  
SmartClock Status and Reference Outputs. One of three  
SYNCHRONIZATION messages is shown:  
Outputs Invalid  
Outputs Valid/  
while the Receiver (unit) is warming up,  
Reduced Accuracy while the unit is in holdover or is locked but has  
not achieved steady-state operation, or  
Outputs Valid  
while the unit is in steady-state operation.  
SmartClock Mode  
The SmartClock Mode area of the screen shows the four operating  
modes:  
• Locked to GPS  
• Recovery  
• Holdover  
• Power-up  
As shown in the sample status screen in Figure 3-6, a >> symbol  
indicates the current operating mode.  
Locked to GPS indicates that the Receiver is locked to GPS. The  
front-panel GPS Lock LED will be illuminated.  
When stabilizing frequency ... is shown, the time output (1 PPS) signal is  
locked and can be used, but the frequency outputs (10 MHz) are not at  
their final or most stable state.  
Recovery indicates that the Receiver is actively working to become  
locked to GPS. All conditions needed to proceed towards a lock have  
been met. Expect an eventual spontaneous transition to a lock (unless  
changing external conditions prevent this, such as loss of tracked  
satellites.)  
Holdover indicates that the Receiver is waiting for conditions that are  
needed to allow the process of recovery from holdover to begin. Once  
these conditions are met, the Receiver will transition on its own to the  
recovery mode.  
When the GPS 1PPS CLK invalid message follows the Holdover label,  
the internal GPS 1 PPS reference signal is inaccurate.  
3-12  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 Visual User Interface  
Receiver Status Screen Data  
When the manually initiated message follows the Holdover label, the  
Receiver has been placed in holdover by the user. An explicit command  
is required to initiate an exit from manual holdover.  
When the 1 PPS TI exceeds hold threshold message follows the  
Holdover label, the phase difference between the 1 PPS time output  
signal and the internal GPS 1 PPS reference signal has exceeded the  
user-entered holdover threshold value.  
When the internal hardware problem message follows the Holdover  
label, a measurement hardware error exists.  
The Holdover Duration message indicates the duration that the Receiver  
has been operating in holdover (and recovery). Thus, this message  
gives you an assessment of the quality of the outputs. The longer the  
Receiver is in holdover the more degraded the outputs become.  
Power-up indicates that the Receiver hasn’t yet achieved GPS lock or  
acquired satellites since it has been powered up. The Receiver is  
measuring the internal reference oscillator’s frequency and adjusting it  
to 10 MHz during this power-up period. Other queries can provide  
insight as to the cause if the Receiver is remaining in powerup longer  
than expected.  
Reference Outputs  
TFOM (Time Figure of Merit) indicates the accuracy of the Receiver’s  
internal 1 PPS signal. A low TFOM value indicates a more accurate  
signal. In the sample screen of Figure 3-6, a value of 3 is displayed,  
meaning that the Time Error ranges from 100 to 1000 nanoseconds.  
The following table lists the TFOM values that could be displayed and  
the corresponding Time Error.  
Time Error  
TFOM Value (in nanoseconds)  
Time Error  
(in nanoseconds)  
TFOM Value  
*0  
*1  
*2  
3
less than 1  
1 – 10  
5
6
7
8
9
104 – 105  
105 – 106  
10 – 100  
100 – 1000  
103 – 104  
106 – 107  
107 – 108  
4
greater than 108  
*The TFOM values 0, 1, and 2 are not presently used in the Receiver. The Receiver will display  
TFOM values ranging from 9 to 3, which is consistent with the specified accuracies of each product.  
Operating and Programming Guide  
3-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 Visual User Interface  
Receiver Status Screen Data  
FFOM (Frequency Figure of Merit) indicates the stability of the  
Receiver’s internal 10 MHz signal. The 10 MHz signal is controlled by  
the SmartClock’s Phase-Locked Loop (PLL). Thus, the FFOM value is  
determined by monitoring the status of the PLL.  
In the sample screen of Figure 3-6, the 0 indicates that the  
SmartClock’s PLL is stabilized. The following table lists and defines  
the FFOM values that could be displayed.  
FFOM Value Definition  
0
PLL stabilized — internal 10 MHz signal within  
specification.  
1
2
PLL stabilizing  
PLL unlocked (holdover) — Initially the 10 MHz signal  
will be within specifications. However, when in holdover,  
the 10 MHz signal will eventually drift out of  
specification.  
3
PLL unlocked (not in holdover) — Do not use the output.  
1PPS TI indicates the difference (timing shift) between the SmartClock  
1 PPS and the internal GPS 1 PPS signals.  
HOLD THR (holdover threshold) displays the user-entered time error  
value.  
ACQUISITION Section of the Status Screen  
ACQUISITION Line  
The ACQUISITION line in the screen summarizes the state of the  
internal GPS Engine as indicated by the Tracking, Not Tracking, and  
Position areas of the screen.  
If the Receiver Engine was considered to be synchronized to the GPS  
signal, the [GPS 1 PPS Valid] message will appear at the end of the  
ACQUISITION line. If the Receiver has not yet synchronized to GPS,  
the [GPS 1 PPS CLK Invalid] message will be displayed.  
Tracking, Not Tracking  
The Tracking table indicates the number of satellites the Receiver is  
tracking.  
The Not Tracking table indicates satellites predicted to be visible that  
are not tracked, and all of the satellites that are assigned to a GPS  
Engine channel but are not currently tracked.  
3-14  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 Visual User Interface  
Receiver Status Screen Data  
Health and status indicators in the tables are defined as follows:  
PRN  
El  
indicates the pseudorandom noise code assigned to the  
satellite.  
indicates the predicted elevation angle, from a range of 0  
to 90°. The predicted elevation is derived from the  
almanac.  
- -  
indicates that the elevation angle is unknown (the  
almanac did not provide this data).  
Az  
indicates the predicted azimuth angle, from a range of 0  
to 359°. The predicted azimuth angle is referenced to true  
north, and is derived from the almanac.  
- - -  
indicates that the azimuth angle is unknown (the  
almanac did not provide this data).  
C/N  
(58503B)  
indicates the carrier-to-noise ratio of the received the  
signal, from a range of 26 to 55. A ratio below 35 is a  
weak signal that may not be acquired by the Receiver.  
or  
indicates the strength of the signal, from a range of 0 to  
255. A signal strength of 20 to 30 is a weak signal that  
may not be acquired by the Receiver.  
SS  
(59551A)  
The health and status indicators in the Not Tracking table are  
described as follows:  
Ignore  
Not OK  
Acq  
indicates that the user has chosen to exclude this  
satellite from a list of satellites available for tracking.  
indicates GPS has reported that this satellite is  
unhealthy.  
indicates the unit is attempting to acquire the satellite  
signal.  
Acq .  
indicates the unit is reading timing information from  
the satellite.  
Acq . .  
indicates the unit is reading satellite orbital  
information.  
ELEV MASK indicates the elevation mask angle in degrees. Satellites  
at or above this elevation angle are considered for  
tracking.  
*attempting  
to track  
indicates that the Receiver is attempting to track a  
satellite.  
Operating and Programming Guide  
3-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 Visual User Interface  
Receiver Status Screen Data  
Time  
When you first power up the unit the time and date that is stored in  
the internal GPS Engine may not be the actual date. The actual time  
and date will be valid after one satellite has been tracked by the  
Receiver.  
NOTE  
There are two accurate ways to express time (GPS or UTC). GPS time  
is offset from UTC time by the number of accumulated leap seconds  
since midnight of January 6, 1980 UTC.  
The Time area of the status screen provides three types of information:  
Time, 1PPS CLK, and ANT DLY.  
Time has four possible modes: GPS, UTC, LOCL GPS, and LOCAL.  
GPS indicates current time and date collected from a satellite in GPS  
Time.  
LOCL GPS indicates GPS Time, offset for the local time zone.  
UTC indicates current time and date collected from a satellite in UTC  
time.  
LOCAL indicates current time and date collected from a satellite offset  
from UTC for the local time zone.  
1PPS CLK can indicate several possible advisory messages. These  
messages are:  
Synchronized 1 PPS locked to GPS, referenced to GPS Time.  
to GPS Time  
Synchronized 1 PPS locked to GPS, referenced to UTC.  
To UTC  
Assessing  
stability ...  
applying hysteresis to locked 1 PPS signal.  
not tracking satellites.  
Inaccurate,  
not tracking  
Inaccurate,  
in survey mode, but has not yet calculated a position.  
inacc position  
Absent or freq no 1PPS signal; or the internal GPS Engine is idle.  
incorrect  
3-16  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 Visual User Interface  
Receiver Status Screen Data  
ANT DLY (antenna delay) displays the user-entered value that is used  
to compensate for the propagation delay of the antenna cable.  
Position  
Position area of the status screen provides four types of information:  
MODE (hold or survey), LAT (latitude), LON (longitude), and HGT  
(height).  
MODE indicates whether the unit is set to Hold or Survey position  
mode.  
When Hold is displayed, the unit’s antenna position has been provided  
by the user, or the average position has been found after completion of  
survey.  
If the unit is in the position Hold mode, the LAT, LON, and HGT “held”  
position coordinates will be displayed.  
If Survey: 57.3% complete is displayed, for example, the Receiver is  
set to survey mode trying to determine the position of the antenna. The  
% value indicates the progress of the surveying.  
At the beginning of a survey (0% completion), the following “estimated”  
position coordinates will be displayed:  
INIT LAT indicates the estimated latitude (North or South) position of  
the unit in degrees, minutes, and seconds.  
INIT LON indicates the estimated longitude (East or West) position of  
the unit in degrees, minutes, and seconds.  
INIT HGT indicates estimated height of the unit’s antenna, in meters  
above the GPS ellipsoid for 58503B (in meters above mean sea level,  
MSL, for the 59551A).  
Once survey starts, the following “averaged” position coordinates will  
be displayed:  
AVG LAT indicates the average latitude (North or South) position of the  
unit in degrees, minutes, and seconds.  
AVG LON indicates the average longitude (East or West) position of the  
unit in degrees, minutes, and seconds.  
AVG HGT indicates average height of the unit’s antenna, in meters  
above the GPS ellipsoid for 58503B (in meters above mean sea level,  
MSL, for the 59551A).  
Operating and Programming Guide  
3-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 Visual User Interface  
Receiver Status Screen Data  
The possible advisory messages that can be displayed when position  
mode is Survey are:  
Suspended: track <4 sats  
Suspended: poor geometry  
Suspended: no track data  
HEALTH MONITOR Section of the Screen  
The HEALTH MONITOR section of the status screen reports errors or  
failures of the key hardware functions. The OK summary message at  
the end of the HEALTH MONITOR line indicates that no errors or  
failures were detected. Error indicates that one or more hardware tests  
failed.  
For each hardware function, OK is reported when it is operating  
normally; Err is displayed when a failure or an error is detected.  
Hardware functions are monitored periodically, with the exception of  
Self Test, which is performed at powerup or when requested.  
The health and status indicators in the HEALTH MONITOR section  
are described as follows:  
Self Test  
Last diagnostic check of the microprocessor system,  
reference oscillator, satellite receiver, and power  
supplies failed.  
Int Pwr  
Oven Pwr  
OCXO  
Internal power supply voltage(s) exceeds tolerance.  
Oscillator oven power supply voltage exceeds tolerance.  
Oscillator output failed.  
EFC  
Oscillator control voltage is at or near full-scale.  
GPS Rcv  
Satellite receiver communication failed, or GPS 1PPS  
reference is absent.  
3-18  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 Visual User Interface  
Receiver Status Screen Data  
This Page Intentionally Left Blank.  
Operating and Programming Guide  
3-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 Visual User Interface  
The Receiver Status Screen at a Glance  
The Receiver Status Screen at a Glance  
3-20  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 Visual User Interface  
The Receiver Status Screen at a Glance  
The Receiver Status Screen at a Glance (cont’d)  
Operating and Programming Guide  
3-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 Visual User Interface  
The Receiver Status Screen at a Glance  
3-22  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
Command Quick Reference  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4 Command Quick Reference  
Chapter Contents  
Chapter Contents  
This chapter is a quick reference that summarizes the GPS Receiver  
commands which allow you to operate and program the Receiver.  
This chapter is organized as follows:  
• An Introduction to GPS Receiver Commands  
page 4-4  
page 4-4  
page 4-4  
page 4-4  
page 4-5  
page 4-5  
page 4-5  
page 4-6  
page 4-6  
page 4-6  
page 4-7  
page 4-7  
page 4-7  
page 4-7  
page 4-8  
page 4-8  
page 4-8  
page 4-8  
page 4-8  
page 4-9  
SCPI Conformance Information  
Command Syntax Conventions  
Command Presentation  
• GPS Satellite Acquisition  
Facilitating Initial Tracking  
Establishing Position  
Selecting Satellites  
Compensating for Antenna Delay  
Monitoring Acquisition  
• 1 PPS Reference Synchronization  
Monitoring 1 PPS Synchronization  
Assessing 1 PPS Quality  
Operating in Holdover  
• Operating Status  
Receiver Operation at a Glance  
Reading the Error Queue  
Reading the Diagnostic Log  
Monitoring Status/Alarm Conditions  
Assessing Receiver Health  
4-2  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4 Command Quick Reference  
Chapter Contents  
• System Time  
page 4-10  
page 4-10  
page 4-10  
page 4-10  
Identifying Time of Next 1 PPS Reference Edge  
Reading Current Time  
Applying Local Time Zone Offset  
Defining the 1 PPS Reference Edge (59551A Only) page 4-10  
Reading Leap Second Status  
page 4-10  
page 4-11  
page 4-12  
page 4-12  
page 4-12  
page 4-12  
page 4-12  
page 4-13  
page 4-13  
page 4-13  
page 4-13  
page 4-14  
page 4-15  
page 4-15  
page 4-15  
page 4-17  
• Programmable Pulse Output (59551A Only)  
• Event Time Stamping (59551A Only)  
Defining the Time-stamped Edge  
Clearing Time Stamp Memory  
Reading Time Stamps  
Processing Memory Overflow  
• Serial Interface Communication  
Configuring I/O Port 1  
Configuring I/O Port 2 (59551A Only)  
Recovering the Last Query Response  
• Receiver Initialization  
• Receiver Identification/Upgrade  
Reading Product Identification  
Installing Firmware via I/O Port 1  
• Receiver Commands at a Glance (cont’d)/Status  
Reporting System at a Glance (foldout)  
Operating and Programming Guide  
4-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4 Command Quick Reference  
An Introduction to GPS Receiver Commands  
An Introduction to GPS Receiver  
Commands  
SCPI Conformance Information  
The SCPI commands used in the GPS Receiver are in conformance  
with the SCPI Standard Version 1994.0.  
Details of all the GPS Receiver commands can be found in Chapter 5,  
“Command Reference,” of this guide.  
Information on the SCPI commands format, syntax, parameter, and  
response types is provided in Appendix B, “Command Syntax and  
Style,” of this guide.  
Command Syntax Conventions  
POSition  
Means you MUST use either all the upper case letters or  
the entire word. The lower case letters are optional.  
For example, POS and POSITION are both valid.  
However, POSI is not valid. (Note: POSition is used here  
as an example, but this convention is true for all  
command keywords.) In other words, the short form of  
the keywords is shown in uppercase.  
NOTE  
When you see quotation marks in the command’s parameter, you must  
send the quotation marks with the command.  
Command Presentation  
The shaded commands listed in the following sections are the “basic”  
(fundamental) or most commonly used commands. These commands  
are essential for operating the Receiver; thus, a brief description of  
each of these commands is included in this section. More complete  
descriptions are provided in Chapter 5, “Command Reference.”  
The non-shaded commands listed in this section are not fundamental  
or not commonly used. These commands are used for one-time setup,  
advanced, or specialized operation of the Receiver. Descriptions of  
these commands are provided in Chapter 5 only.  
4-4  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4 Command Quick Reference  
GPS Satellite Acquisition  
GPS Satellite Acquisition  
The following commands are provided to facilitate initial GPS satellite  
tracking, to establish accurate GPS antenna position, to select or ignore  
satellites, to compensate for antenna cable delay, and to monitor the  
acquisition.  
Facilitating Initial Tracking  
:GPS:INITial:DATE <four-digit year>, <month>, <day>  
:GPS:INITial:POSition N or S, <latitude degree>,  
<latitude minute>,  
<latitude second>,  
E or W, <longitude degree>,  
<longitude minute>,  
<longitude second>,  
<height above the GPS ellipsoid, in meters (58503B)>  
or  
<height above mean sea level, in meters (59551A)>  
:GPS:INITial:TIME <hour>, <minute>, <second>  
Establishing Position  
:GPS:POSition  
N or S, <latitude degree>,  
<latitude minute>,  
<latitude second>,  
E or W, <longitude degree>,  
<longitude minute>,  
<longitude second>,  
<height above the GPS ellipsoid, in meters (58503B)>  
or  
<height above mean sea level, in meters (59551A)>  
Specifies the position of the GPS antenna.  
:GPS:POSition?  
Returns the current average position of the GPS antenna.  
:GPS:POSition:ACTual?  
Returns the current instantaneous position of the GPS antenna.  
:GPS:POSition LAST  
:GPS:POSition SURVey  
:GPS:POSition:HOLD:LAST?  
:GPS:POSition:HOLD:STATe?  
:GPS:POSition:SURVey:PROGress?  
:GPS:POSition:SURVey:STATe ONCE  
:GPS:POSition:SURVey:STATe?  
:GPS:POSition:SURVey:STATe:POWerup ON or OFF  
:GPS:POSition:SURVey:STATe:POWerup?  
Basic command  
Operating and Programming Guide  
4-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4 Command Quick Reference  
GPS Satellite Acquisition  
Selecting Satellites  
<select> = IGNore or INCLude  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:EMANgle <degrees>  
Sets the GPS elevation mask angle value.  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:EMANgle?  
Returns the GPS elevation mask angle value.  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:IGNore <PRN>, ... , <PRN>  
(59551A)  
(59551A)  
Sends list of satellites to ignore.  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:IGNore?  
Returns list of satellites to ignore.  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:INCLude <PRN>, ... , <PRN> (59551A)  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:INCLude?  
(59551A)  
(59551A)  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:<select>:ALL  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:<select>:COUNt?  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:<select>:NONE  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:<select>:STATe? <PRN>  
Compensating for Antenna Delay  
:GPS:REFerence:ADELay <seconds>  
Sets the GPS antenna delay value in seconds.  
:GPS:REFerence:ADELay?  
Returns the GPS antenna delay value in seconds.  
Monitoring Acquisition  
:GPS:REFerence:VALid?  
Indicates whether the date and time are valid (1 = valid).  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking?  
Returns a list of all satellites being tracked.  
:GPS:SATellite:VISible:PREDicted?  
Returns the list of satellites (PRN) that the almanac predicts should be visible, given date, time, and  
position.  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:COUNt?  
:GPS:SATellite:VISible:PREDicted:COUNt?  
Basic command  
4-6  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4 Command Quick Reference  
1 PPS Reference Synchronization  
1 PPS Reference Synchronization  
The following commands are provided to monitor the operating mode of the  
reference oscillator, to determine the accuracy and stability of the reference  
output signal(s), and to control the oscillator holdover process.  
Monitoring 1 PPS Synchronization  
:SYNChronization:STATe?  
Returns the Receiver state.  
:DIAGnostic:ROSCillator:EFControl:RELative?  
:LED:GPSLock?  
:LED:HOLDover?  
Assessing 1 PPS Quality  
:SYNChronization:FFOMerit?  
Returns the Frequency Figure of Merit.  
:SYNChronization:HOLDover:TUNCertainty:PREDicted?  
Returns an estimate of the time error that can be expected for a one day holdover, given  
the current state of SmartClock learning in the Receiver.  
:SYNChronization:HOLDover:TUNCertainty:PRESent?  
Returns the current time interval error at any time during holdover operation, given the  
current state of SmartClock learning in the Receiver.  
:SYNChronization:TFOMerit?  
Returns the Time Figure of Merit.  
:SYNChronization:TINTerval?  
Returns the difference or timing shift between the SmartClock 1 PPS and the  
GPS 1 PPS signals.  
:SYNChronization:HOLDover:DURation?  
:SYNChronization:HOLDover:DURation:THReshold <seconds>  
:SYNChronization:HOLDover:DURation:THReshold?  
:SYNChronization:HOLDover:DURation:THReshold:EXCeeded?  
Operating in Holdover  
Initiating Manual Holdover  
:SYNChronization:HOLDover:INITiate  
Recovering from Holdover  
:SYNChronization:HOLDover:WAITing?  
Returns prioritized reason why the Receiver is waiting to recover.  
:SYNChronization:HOLDover:RECovery:INITiate  
:SYNChronization:HOLDover:RECovery:LIMit:IGNore  
:SYNChronization:IMMediate  
Basic command  
Operating and Programming Guide  
4-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4 Command Quick Reference  
Operating Status  
Operating Status  
The following commands are provided to obtain Receiver status information.  
There are several ways to obtain Receiver status using commands.  
For example, you can send a command to display the Receiver Status screen,  
to read the error queue, and to read the diagnostic log. You can also send a  
sequence of commands to read and control the status registers for alarm  
generation.  
Receiver Operation at a Glance  
:SYSTem:STATus?  
Outputs a fully formatted status screen.  
:SYSTem:STATus:LENGth?  
Reading the Error Queue  
:SYSTem:ERRor?  
Returns the oldest error in the Error Queue and removes that error from the queue (first in, first out).  
Reading the Diagnostic Log  
:DIAGnostic:LOG:CLEar  
Clears the diagnostic log.  
:DIAGnostic:LOG:READ:ALL?  
Returns all of the most recent diagnostic log entries.  
:DIAGnostic:LOG:CLEar <current log size>  
:DIAGnostic:LOG:COUNt?  
:DIAGnostic:LOG:READ?  
:DIAGnostic:LOG:READ? <entry number>  
Monitoring Status/Alarm Conditions  
Clearing and Presetting Alarms  
*CLS  
Clears the event status registers and error queue.  
:STATus:PRESet:ALARm  
Reading and Qualifying Alarms  
:LED:ALARm?  
Returns status of front-panel Alarm LED.  
*SRE <bit mask>  
*SRE?  
*STB?  
Basic command  
4-8  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4 Command Quick Reference  
Operating Status  
Reading and Qualifying Receiver Status  
<register> = OPERation  
<register> = QUEStionable  
<register> = OPERation:HARDware  
<register> = OPERation:HOLDover  
<register> = OPERation:POWerup  
:STATus:<register>:CONDition?  
Returns the Condition Status Register value.  
:STATus:<register>:EVENt?  
Returns the Event Status Register value.  
:STATus:<register>:ENABle <bit mask>  
:STATus:<register>:ENABle?  
:STATus:<register>:NTRansition <bit mask>  
:STATus:<register>:NTRansition?  
:STATus:<register>:PTRansition <bit mask>  
:STATus:<register>:PTRansition?  
Reading and Qualifying Command Error Status  
*ESE <bit mask>  
*ESE?  
*ESR?  
Reporting Questionable Status  
:STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition:USER SET or CLEar  
:STATus:QUEStionable:EVENt:USER PTR or NTR  
Assessing Receiver Health  
*TST?  
Executes an internal selftest and reports the results.  
:DIAGnostic:LIFetime:COUNt?  
:DIAGnostic:TEST? ALL or DISPlay or PROCessor or RAM or EEPROM or UART or QSPI  
or FPGA or INTerpolator or IREFerence or GPS or POWer  
:DIAGnostic:TEST:RESult?  
Basic command  
Operating and Programming Guide  
4-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4 Command Quick Reference  
System Time  
System Time  
The following commands are provided to allow you to monitor and control the  
system date and time. These commands allow you access to a very accurate  
system clock that provides both date and time, to customize the clock for a local  
time zone, to identify the exact time, to identify the accumulated time  
difference (in seconds) between the GPS and UTC timelines, and to monitor  
leap second occurrences.  
Identifying Time of Next 1 PPS Reference Edge  
R :PTIMe:TCODe?  
Returns timecode message 980 to 20 ms prior to 1 PPS of indicated time.  
Reading Current Time  
:PTIMe:DATE? or  
:PTIMe:TIME? or  
:PTIMe:TIME:STRing?  
:SYSTem:DATE?  
:SYSTem:TIME?  
Applying Local Time Zone Offset  
:PTIMe:TZONe <hours>, <minutes>  
Sets the time zone local time offset to provide an offset from UTC to serve as the basis for all  
reported time.  
:PTIMe:TZONe?  
Returns the local time zone offset.  
Defining the 1 PPS Reference Edge (59551A Only)  
:PTIMe:PPS:EDGE RISing or FALLing  
Selects the polarity of the 1 PPS on-time edge.  
:PTIMe:PPS:EDGE?  
Returns the polarity of the 1 PPS on-time edge.  
Reading Leap Second Status  
:PTIMe:LEAPsecond:ACCumulated?  
Returns the leap second difference accumulated between GPS time and UTC time since the beginning  
of GPS time. The time units are seconds.  
:PTIMe:LEAPsecond:DATE?  
:PTIMe:LEAPsecond:DURation?  
:PTIMe:LEAPsecond:STATe?  
Basic command  
R: Accessible via rear-panel PORT 1.  
4-10  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4 Command Quick Reference  
Programmable Pulse Output (59551A Only)  
Programmable Pulse Output (59551A  
Only)  
The following commands are provided to allow you to operate and control the  
programmable pulse output of the 59551A GPS Receiver. The pulse output,  
which is programmable by the user, can either generate a stream of pulses at  
a specified start time and repetition interval, or can produce a single pulse at  
a specified time and then stop.  
:PULSe:CONTinuous:PERiod <seconds>  
Sets the interval between pulses in seconds.  
:PULSe:CONTinuous:PERiod?  
Returns the interval between pulses in seconds.  
:PULSe:CONTinuous:STATe ON or OFF  
Selects whether the Programmable Pulse output will be just one pulse or a sequence of pulses.  
:PULSe:CONTinuous:STATe?  
Identifies whether the Programmable Pulse output is set to output a single pulse or  
sequence of pulses.  
:PULSe:REFerence:EDGE RISing or FALLing  
Selects the polarity of the Programmable Pulse on-time edge.  
:PULSe:REFerence:EDGE?  
Returns the polarity of the Programmable Pulse on-time edge.  
:PULSe:STARt:DATE <four-digit year>, <month>, <day>  
Sets the date when the individual pulse (or first pulse of the pulse sequence) is to be generated at the  
Programmable Pulse output.  
:PULSe:STARt:DATE?  
Returns the date when the individual pulse (or first pulse of the pulse sequence) is generated at the  
Programmable Pulse output.  
:PULSe:STARt:TIME <hour>, <minute>, <second>  
Sets the time when the individual pulse (or first pulse of the pulse sequence) is to be generated at the  
Programmable Pulse output.  
:PULSe:STARt:TIME?  
Returns the time when the individual pulse (or first pulse of the pulse sequence) is generated at the  
Programmable Pulse output.  
Basic command  
Operating and Programming Guide  
4-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4 Command Quick Reference  
Event Time Stamping (59551A Only)  
Event Time Stamping (59551A Only)  
The following commands are provided to allow you to time-tag and record  
events such as power surges and power outages. The time tagging input  
feature allows you to use the Receiver with equipment which produce a TTL  
edge when some important event happens in the base station. The Receiver has  
three time tagging inputs which record the time of occurrence of TTL edge(s).  
Defining the Time-stamped Edge  
<channel> = 1 or 2 or 3  
:SENSe:TSTamp<channel>:EDGE RISing or FALLing  
Selects the polarity of the edges the Receiver will timestamp.  
:SENSe:TSTamp<channel>:EDGE?  
Returns the polarity of the edges the Receiver will timestamp.  
Clearing Time Stamp Memory  
:SENSe:DATA:CLEar  
Clears the data in the measurement buffer for all Time Tag inputs.  
:SENSe:DATA:CLEar "TSTamp 1" or "TSTamp 2" or "TSTamp 3"  
Reading Time Stamps  
:SENSe:DATA? "TSTamp 1" or "TSTamp 2" or "TSTamp 3"  
Returns the data in the timestamp measurement buffer for the specified Time Tag input.  
:FORMat:DATA ASCii or INTeger  
:FORMat:DATA?  
:SENSe:DATA:POINts?  
:SENSe:DATA:POINTs? "TSTamp 1" or "TSTamp 2" or "TSTamp 3"  
:SENSe:DATA:TSTamp? "TSTamp 1" or "TSTamp 2" or "TSTamp 3", <entry number>  
Processing Memory Overflow  
:SENSe:DATA:MEMory:OVERflow:COUNt?  
:SENSe:DATA:MEMory:OVERflow:COUNt? "TSTamp 1" or "TSTamp 2" or "TSTamp 3"  
:SENSe:DATA:MEMory:SAVE FIRST or LAST  
:SENSe:DATA:MEMory:SAVE?  
Basic command  
4-12  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4 Command Quick Reference  
Serial Interface Communication  
Serial Interface Communication  
The following commands are provided to allow you to configure the serial  
interface port(s) for instrument communications.  
Configuring I/O Port 1  
R
:SYSTem:COMMunicate?  
R
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial1:BAUD 1200 or 2400 or 9600 or 19200  
R,F :SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial1:BAUD?  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial1:BITS 7 or 8  
R,F :SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial1:BITS?  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial1:FDUPlex ON or OFF  
R,F :SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial1:FDUPlex?  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial1:PACE XON or NONE  
R,F :SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial1:PACE?  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial1:PARity EVEN or ODD or NONE  
R,F :SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial1:PARity?  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial1:SBITs 1 or 2  
R
(59551A)  
R
R
R
R
(59551A)  
R,F :SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial1:SBITs?  
Configuring I/O Port 2 (59551A Only)  
F
:SYSTem:COMMunicate?  
F
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial2:BAUD 1200 or 2400 or 9600 or 19200  
R,F :SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial2:BAUD?  
R,F :SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial2:BITS?  
F
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial2:FDUPlex ON or OFF  
R,F :SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial2:FDUPlex?  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial2:PACE XON or NONE  
R,F :SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial2:PACE?  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial2:PARity EVEN or ODD or NONE or ONE  
F
F
R,F :SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial2:PARity?  
R,F :SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial2:SBITs?  
Recovering the Last Query Response  
:DIAGnostic:QUERy:RESPonse?  
Basic command  
R: Accessible via rear-panel PORT 1.  
F: Accessible via Front-panel PORT 2 of the 59551A  
Operating and Programming Guide  
4-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4 Command Quick Reference  
Receiver Initialization  
Receiver Initialization  
The following commands are provided to allow you to initialize or preset the  
serial interface port(s) and the Receiver to their factory shipment values.  
R :SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial1:PRESet  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial2:PRESet (59551A Only)  
:SYSTem:PRESet  
Basic command  
R: Accessible via Rear-panel PORT 1.  
4-14  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4 Command Quick Reference  
Receiver Identification/Upgrade  
Receiver Identification/Upgrade  
The commands provided in this section allow you to query the identification of  
the Receiver, and to perform firmware upgrades in the field after you obtain a  
new firmware disk.  
Reading Product Identification  
*IDN?  
Returns the Receiver identification.  
Installing Firmware via I/O Port 1  
R *CLS  
R :DIAGnostic:DOWNload <Motorola S-record>  
R :DIAGnostic:ERASe  
R :DIAGnostic:ERASe?  
R :SYSTem:ERRor?  
R :SYSTem:LANGuage "INSTALL" or "PRIMARY"  
R :SYSTem:LANGuage?  
Basic command  
R: Accessible via Rear-panel Port 1.  
Operating and Programming Guide  
4-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4 Command Quick Reference  
Receiver Identification/Upgrade  
Receiver Commands at a Glance  
4-16  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4 Command Quick Reference  
Receiver Identification/Upgrade  
Receiver Commands at a Glance (cont’d)  
Operating and Programming Guide  
4-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4 Command Quick Reference  
Status Reporting System at a Glance  
Status Reporting System at a Glance  
4-18  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
Command Reference  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Chapter Contents  
Chapter Contents  
This chapter provides a description of each command that can be used  
to operate the GPS Receiver. The commands are grouped by functions.  
The functions are grouped and ordered the same as they are in  
Chapter 4, “Command Quick Reference,” and on the foldout “Receiver  
Commands at a Glance (cont’d).”  
This chapter is organized as follows:  
• Command Syntax Conventions  
• Description Format  
page 5-4  
page 5-5  
Commands and Returns  
page 5-5  
Query-Specific Information  
page 5-6  
• GPS Satellite Acquisition  
page 5-7  
Facilitating Initial Tracking  
Establishing Position  
page 5-9  
page 5-12  
page 5-17  
page 5-22  
page 5-24  
page 5-27  
page 5-28  
page 5-30  
page 5-36  
page 5-39  
page 5-41  
page 5-42  
page 5-43  
page 5-48  
page 5-70  
Selecting Satellites  
Compensating for Antenna Delay  
Monitoring Acquisition  
• 1 PPS Reference Synchronization  
Monitoring 1 PPS Synchronization  
Assessing 1 PPS Quality  
Operating in Holdover  
• Operating Status  
Receiver Operation at a Glance  
Reading the Error Queue  
Reading the Diagnostic Log  
Monitoring Status/Alarm Conditions  
Assessing Receiver Health  
5-2  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Chapter Contents  
• System Time  
page 5-73  
page 5-74  
page 5-75  
page 5-77  
Identifying Time of Next 1 PPS Reference Edge  
Reading Current Time  
Applying Local Time Zone Offset  
Defining the 1 PPS Reference Edge (59551A Only) page 5-78  
Reading Leap Second Status  
page 5-79  
page 5-83  
page 5-89  
page 5-90  
page 5-91  
page 5-92  
page 5-97  
page 5-100  
page 5-101  
page 5-108  
page 5-109  
page 5-113  
page 5-114  
page 5-115  
• Programmable Pulse Output (59551A Only)  
• Event Time Stamping (59551A Only)  
Defining the Time-stamped Edge  
Clearing Time Stamp Memory  
Reading Time Stamps  
Processing Memory Overflows  
• Serial Interface Communication  
Configuring I/O Ports  
Recovering the Last Query Response  
• Receiver Initialization  
• Receiver Identification/Upgrade  
Reading Product Identification  
Installing Firmware via I/O Port 1  
See Appendix B, “Command Syntax and Style,” for details regarding  
command Expanded Syntax, parameter types, and query response  
types.  
Operating and Programming Guide  
5-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Command Syntax Conventions  
Command Syntax Conventions  
POSition  
Means you MUST use either all the uppercase letters or  
the entire word. The lowercase letters are optional. For  
example, POS and POSITION are both valid. However,  
POSI is not valid. (Note POSition is used here as an  
example, but this convention is true for all command  
keywords.) In other words, the short form of the  
keywords is shown in uppercase.  
<n>  
The notation <n> ending a command keyword indicates  
a numeric suffix, used to differentiate multiple  
instances of the same structure. The numeric suffix is  
applied to both the short and long forms. The valid  
range for the value n is specified from an enumerated  
list, for example [1|2|3], or from a range, for example  
[1..3] to indicate any of the integers from 1 to 3.  
"TSTamp 1" When you see quotation marks in the command’s  
parameter, you must send the quotation marks with the  
command.  
5-4  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Description Format  
Description Format  
Commands and Returns  
Product Compatibility  
(if not present, the command is  
supported by both products)  
Command Index  
Default Setting  
(commands only)  
Required characters are shown  
in bold type. "..." denotes one  
or more parameters; refer to  
Expanded Syntax for details.  
HP 59551A  
Scope  
(commands only)  
c
:SYSTem:PRESet  
:PULSe:STARt:DATE . . .  
Identifies a "basic"  
(fundamental) command.  
a
b
1994,1,1  
Identifies the date when the individual p  
the pulse sequence) is generated at th  
output.  
Synopsis  
NON-VOLATILE  
This command identifies the date when  
the pulse sequence) is generated at the P
Description  
Command Mnemonic  
Consult Appendix B: Command  
Syntax and Style for notational style.  
Expanded Syntax  
:PULSe:STARt:DATE <four-digit year  
Allowed Values,  
Range and Resolution  
Parameter  
The <four-digit year> range is 1994 to  
The <month> range is 1 to 12.  
The <day> range is 1 to 31.  
When the command may  
be issued  
Context Dependencies  
If you select a date and time which occu  
the completion of powerup and first GP
successfuly find a start – and therefore w  
If the Receiver has been set up to use a t  
and time, the parameters provided should  
time.  
:SYSTem:PRESet sets the date to January  
Side Effects  
Secondary effects on  
other functions.  
Concepts  
Theory  
Indicates that you cautiously use the :SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIAL  
commands to change the Receiver's serial interface parameters (i.e., BAUD, BITS,  
PACE, PARity, and SBITs) from their factory default values. It is recommended that  
you configure your PC's serial port settings to match the Receiver's factory default  
values instead. However, if you must change the parameters, be sure to write down or  
record all changes. Refer to Chapter 2, "Serial Interface Capabilities," in this guide for  
more information.  
This command can be executed  
via the rear-panel PORT 1 only.  
:SYSTem:PRESet  
Not affected  
R
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:BAUD . . .  
!
Sets the baud rate of PORT 1.  
Operating and Programming Guide  
5-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Description Format  
Query-Specific Information  
Description of Response Formats (ASCII-encoded)  
The following legend provides the meaning of each type of response  
format. Refer to Table B-3 in Appendix B, “Command Syntax and  
Style,” for details.  
RESPONSE FORMAT Example  
Description  
0 or 1  
0
Single character,  
one or zero  
dd  
d.d  
+10  
Integer  
+1.5  
Fixed-point number  
Floating-point number  
Alphanumeric characters  
Quoted string  
d.dEe  
XYZ  
+1.00000E-009  
LOCK  
“ XYZ ”  
dd, ...  
“19:49:51” or “No error”  
+14, +15, +18, +22, +29  
Comma-separated list of  
integers  
“ XYZ”, ...  
“Log 001:19950101.00:00:00: Power on”,  
Comma-separated list of  
“Log 002:19950101.00:10:00: Log cleared” quoted strings  
5-6  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
GPS Satellite Acquisition  
GPS Satellite Acquisition  
The GPS Receiver is designed to acquire time transfer information (time, date,  
and position) from the GPS satellites, which is used by the Receiver’s internal  
reference oscillator and SmartClocktechnology to lock to GPS. It acquires a  
precise time and date by tracking at least one satellite. By tracking at least four  
satellites, it precisely determines the position of the antenna. With this  
information, the Receiver can produce a precise 1 PPS signal that is exactly  
synchronous to Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) as determined by GPS.  
The following commands are provided to facilitate initiate GPS satellite  
tracking, to establish accurate GPS antenna position, to select or ignore  
satellites, to compensate for antenna cable delay, and to monitor the  
acquisition.  
! Facilitating Initial Tracking  
:GPS:INITial:DATE ...  
:GPS:INITial:POSition ...  
:GPS:INITial:TIME ...  
! Establishing Position  
:GPS:POSition ...  
:GPS:POSition?  
:GPS:POSition:ACTual?  
:GPS:POSition:HOLD:LAST?  
:GPS:POSition:HOLD:STATe?  
:GPS:POSition:SURVey:PROGress?  
:GPS:POSition:SURVey:STATe ...  
:GPS:POSition:SURVey:STATe?  
:GPS:POSition:SURVey:STATe:POWerup ...  
:GPS:POSition:SURVey:STATe:POWerup?  
! Selecting Satellites  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:EMANgle ...  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:EMANgle?  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:IGNore ...  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:IGNore?  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:INCLude ...  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:INCLude?  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:<select>:ALL  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:<select>:COUNt?  
(59551A)  
(59551A)  
(59551A)  
(59551A)  
(59551A)  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:<select>:STATe? ...  
Operating and Programming Guide  
5-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
GPS Satellite Acquisition  
! Compensating for Antenna Delay  
:GPS:REFerence:ADELay ...  
:GPS:REFerence:ADELay?  
! Monitoring Acquisition  
:GPS:REFerence:VALid?  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking?  
:GPS:SATellite:VISible:PREDicted?  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:COUNt?  
:GPS:SATellite:VISible:PREDicted:COUNt?  
5-8  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
GPS Satellite Acquisition  
Facilitating Initial Tracking ______________________________  
:SYSTem:PRESet  
:GPS:INITial:DATE . . .  
Sets an approximate date for faster initial GPS acquisition.  
Not affected  
VOLATILE  
This command sets an approximate date for faster initial GPS acquisition.  
Following powerup, the Receiver obtains the current date from satellite data.  
This process occurs automatically. Providing an approximate date, however,  
reduces the time to initial GPS tracking by assisting the Receiver in finding  
satellites.  
Expanded Syntax  
:GPS:INITial:DATE <four-digit year>,<month>,<day>  
Parameter  
Range: the year, month, and day must be valid.  
Context Dependencies  
This command is valid prior to first satellite tracked (see bit 0 of the Operation  
Status Register). Sending this command after this time will generate  
error -221.  
The initial date and time needs to be within 3 minutes of the actual date and  
time to be effective in enabling faster initial GPS acquisition.  
Operating and Programming Guide  
5-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
GPS Satellite Acquisition  
Facilitating Initial Tracking ____________________ (continued)  
:SYSTem:PRESet  
:GPS:INITial:POSition . . .  
Sets an approximate position for faster initial GPS acquisition.  
:Not affected  
VOLATILE  
This command sets an approximate position for faster initial GPS acquisition.  
Following powerup, the Receiver refines its position from the satellite data.  
This process occurs automatically. This command is most effective when the  
retained position differs significantly from the Receiver’s true position.  
Expanded Syntax  
:GPS:INITial:POSition N or S, <latitude degree>,  
<latitude minute>,  
<latitude second>,  
E or W, <longitude degree>,  
<longitude minute>,  
<longitude second>,  
<height above the GPS ellipsoid, in meters (58303B)>  
or  
<height above mean sea level, in meters (59551A)>  
Parameter  
This command requires three position coordinates: latitude, longitude, and  
height. Position must be specified with respect to the World Geodetic System  
1984 (WGS-1984) datum absolute earth coordinates.  
The latitude coordinate is preceded by either N or S, which denotes the  
northern or southern hemisphere, respectively. The longitude coordinate is  
preceded by either E or W, which denotes the eastern or western hemisphere,  
respectively.  
The following table lists the allowed settings of other parameters:  
Parameter  
Range  
Precision  
Parameter  
Range  
Precision  
<latitude degrees>  
<latitude minutes>  
<latitude seconds>  
<height, m>  
0 to 90  
1
<longitude degrees> 0 to 180  
<longitude minutes> 0 to 59  
<longitude seconds> 0 to 59.999  
1
0 to 59  
1
1
0 to 59.999  
0.001  
0.01  
0.001  
-1000.00 to  
18,000.00  
Context Dependencies  
This command is valid while the Receiver is in survey mode prior to first  
computed position. Sending this command while the Receiver is not in survey  
mode will generate error -221.  
5-10  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
GPS Satellite Acquisition  
Facilitating Initial Tracking ____________________ (continued)  
:SYSTem:PRESet  
:GPS:INITial:TIME . . .  
Sets an approximate time for faster initial GPS acquisition.  
Not affected  
VOLATILE  
This command sets an approximate time for faster initial GPS acquisition.  
Following powerup, the Receiver obtains the current time from satellite data.  
This process occurs automatically. Providing an approximate time, however,  
reduces the time to initial GPS tracking by assisting the Receiver in finding  
satellites.  
Expanded Syntax  
:GPS:INITial:TIME <hour>,<minute>,<second>  
Parameter  
Range: all parameters (hour, minutes, seconds) must be valid.  
Context Dependencies  
This command is valid prior to first satellite tracked (see bit 0 of the Operation  
Status Register). Sending this command after this time will generate  
error -221.  
The initial date and time needs to be within 3 minutes of the actual date and  
time to be effective in enabling faster initial GPS acquisition.  
Operating and Programming Guide  
5-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
GPS Satellite Acquisition  
Establishing Position_____________________________________  
:SYSTem:PRESet  
:GPS:POSition . . .  
Defines the position of the Receiver.  
latitude:  
longitude: E 0:00:00.000  
height: 0 meters  
N 0:00:00.000  
NON-VOLATILE  
This command defines the position of the Receiver. The Receiver uses this  
position to predict satellite visibility and to determine time. An accurate  
position is necessary for precise time transfer.  
Expanded Syntax  
:GPS:POSition  
N or S, <latitude degree>,  
<latitude minute>,  
<latitude second>,  
E or W, <longitude degree>,  
<longitude minute>,  
<longitude second>,  
<height above the GPS ellipsoid, in meters (58303B)>  
or  
<height above mean sea level, in meters (59551A)>  
:GPS:POSition LAST  
:GPS:POSition SURVey  
Parameter  
The numeric form of this command requires three position coordinates:  
latitude, longitude, and height. Position must be specified with respect to the  
World Geodetic System 1984 (WGS-1984) datum absolute earth coordinates.  
The latitude coordinate is preceded by either N or S, which denotes the  
northern or southern hemisphere, respectively. The longitude coordinate is  
preceded by either E or W, which denotes the eastern or western hemisphere,  
respectively.  
The following table lists the allowed settings of other parameters:  
Parameter  
Range  
Precision  
Parameter  
Range  
Precision  
<latitude degrees>  
<latitude minutes>  
<latitude seconds>  
<height, m>  
0 to 90  
1
<longitude degrees> 0 to 180  
<longitude minutes> 0 to 59  
<longitude seconds> 0 to 59.999  
1
0 to 59  
1
1
0 to 59.999  
0.001  
0.01  
0.001  
-1000.00 to  
18,000.00  
5-12  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
GPS Satellite Acquisition  
Establishing Position ___________________________ (continued)  
LAST denotes the last specified position. This parameter is provided to cancel  
surveying (automatic position computation) and restore the last position  
setting.  
SURVey directs the Receiver to stop surveying and use the computed position.  
This position is the average of individual position computations.  
Context Dependencies  
Error -221 is generated if this command is sent as SURV and no valid survey  
calculation has ever been computed.  
Side Effects  
This command stops position surveying. The computed position is retained and  
applied only when SURVey is specified.  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
:GPS:POSition?  
Returns the current average position of the GPS antenna.  
XYZ or  
dd or  
d.dEe,  
...  
This query returns the current average position of the Receiver.  
Response  
Returns a list of values defining the Receiver position:  
N or S, <latitude degree>, <latitude minute>, <latitude second>,  
E or W, <longitude degree>,<longitude minute>, <longitude second>,  
<height above the GPS ellipsoid, in meters (58303B)> or <height above mean  
sea level, in meters (59551A)>.  
Context Dependencies  
Error -230 is generated if in survey and first calculation has not occurred.  
Operating and Programming Guide  
5-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
GPS Satellite Acquisition  
Establishing Position___________________________ (continued)  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
:GPS:POSition:ACTual?  
Returns the current instantaneous position of the GPS antenna.  
XYZ or  
dd or  
d.dEe,  
...  
This query returns the current instantaneous position of the GPS antenna.  
Response  
Returns a list of values defining the Receiver position:  
N or S, <latitude degree>, <latitude minute>, <latitude second>,  
E or W, <longitude degree>,<longitude minute>, <longitude second>,  
<height above the GPS ellipsoid, in meters (58303B)> or <height above mean  
sea level, in meters (59551A)>.  
Context Dependencies  
Error -230 is generated if in survey and first calculation has not occurred.  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
:GPS:POSition:HOLD:LAST?  
Returns the last position-hold setting.  
XYZ or  
dd or  
d.dEe,  
...  
This query returns the last position-hold setting, which is restored when the  
:GPS:POSition LAST command is sent. Refer to the description of the  
:GPS:POSition command on page 5-13 for details.  
Response  
Returns a list of values defining the Receiver position:  
N or S, <latitude degree>, <latitude minute>, <latitude second>,  
E or W, <longitude degree>,<longitude minute>, <longitude second>,  
<height above the GPS ellipsoid, in meters (58303B)> or <height above mean  
sea level, in meters (59551A)>.  
Context Dependencies  
This query is always valid, but if the Receiver has not been in position-hold  
mode since it was preset (see :SYSTem:PRESet), the value returned will be the  
preset position.  
5-14  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
GPS Satellite Acquisition  
Establishing Position ___________________________ (continued)  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
:GPS:POSition:HOLD:STATe?  
Identifies whether the Receiver is in position-hold or survey mode.  
0 or 1  
This query identifies whether the Receiver is in position-hold or survey mode.  
In survey mode, the Receiver continually refines its position. In position-hold  
mode, the position setting does not change.  
Response  
A value of 0 indicates not in position hold (in survey mode); a value of 1  
indicates in position hold.  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
:GPS:POSition:SURVey:PROGress?  
Returns percent completed while in survey mode.  
d.d  
This query returns percent completed while in survey mode. Automatic  
transition to position-hold mode occurs following completion of survey mode  
(indicated by 100).  
Response  
The range is 0 to 100%. The units are percent.  
Context Dependencies  
This query is only valid while surveying for position (:GPS:POS:SURV:STATe?  
returns ONCE or status bit 3 = 0 in the Operation Status Register). If queried  
while not surveying, error -221 is generated.  
:SYSTem:PRESet  
:GPS:POSition:SURVey:STATe . . .  
Initiates survey mode during which the Receiver determines its  
position from satellite data.  
ONCE  
This command initiates survey mode during which the Receiver determines its  
position from satellite data. The Receiver refines successive positional  
estimates to obtain a final position, transitions from survey to position-hold  
mode.  
Expanded Syntax  
:GPS:POSition:SURVey:STATe ONCE  
Operating and Programming Guide  
5-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
GPS Satellite Acquisition  
Establishing Position___________________________ (continued)  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
:GPS:POSition:SURVey:STATe?  
Identifies whether the Receiver is in survey or position-hold mode.  
XYZ or 0  
This query identifies whether the Receiver is in survey or position-hold mode.  
In survey mode, the Receiver continually refines its position. In position-hold  
mode, the position does not change.  
Response  
A response of ONCE indicates that the Receiver is in survey mode. A response  
of 0 indicates the Receiver is in position-hold mode.  
:SYSTem:PRESet  
:GPS:POSition:SURVey:STATe:POWerup . . .  
Selects position mode to be used at powerup.  
ON  
NON-VOLATILE  
This command specifies whether the Receiver always surveys at powerup or  
restores its last position at powerup.  
Expanded Syntax  
:GPS:POSition:SURVey:STATe:POWerup ON or OFF  
Parameter  
OFF sets the Receiver to powerup in the last valid position. ON sets the  
Receiver to survey on powerup.  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
:GPS:POSition:SURVey:STATe:POWerup?  
Returns the position mode to be used at powerup.  
0 or 1  
This query returns the position mode to be used at powerup.  
Response  
A value of 0 indicates the Receiver is set to powerup in the last valid position.  
A value of 1 indicates the Receiver is set to survey on powerup.  
5-16  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
GPS Satellite Acquisition  
Selecting Satellites _______________________________________  
:SYSTem:PRESet  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:EMANgle . . .  
Sets the GPS elevation mask angle value (in degrees).  
10  
NON-VOLATILE  
This command instructs the Receiver to allow tracking those satellites for  
which the elevation angle is greater than this elevation mask angle. Satellites  
below this elevation are visible, but will not be tracked.  
Expanded Syntax  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:EMANgle <degrees>  
Parameter  
<degrees> range is 0 degrees (horizon) to 89 degrees. The resolution is  
1 degree.  
The maximum recommended value while the position is being surveyed is  
15 degrees, to allow tracking of four satellites needed for an accurate position  
determination.  
Once the survey is complete, the elevation mask angle can be increased to avoid  
interference problems caused by buildings and trees and minimize effects of  
multipath, if necessary.  
Values above 40 degrees severely limit GPS signal availability, and are not  
recommended.  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:EMANgle?  
Returns the GPS elevation mask angle value.  
dd  
This query returns the GPS elevation mask angle value.  
Response  
The range is 0 degrees to 89 degrees.  
Operating and Programming Guide  
5-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
GPS Satellite Acquisition  
Selecting Satellites _____________________________(continued)  
59551A  
:SYSTem:PRESet  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:IGNore . . .  
Adds the specified satellites to the list that the Receiver ignores  
No satellites ignored  
for tracking.  
NON-VOLATILE  
This command adds the specified satellites to the list that the Receiver ignores  
for tracking. Each satellite is identified by its pseudorandom noise code (PRN).  
Expanded Syntax  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:IGNore <PRN>, . . ., <PRN>  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:IGNore:NONE  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:IGNore:ALL  
Parameter  
<PRN> parameter is the pseudorandom noise code of the satellite(s) you want  
the Receiver to ignore. Each satellite has its own unique PRN.  
Context Dependencies  
This command is always valid. On send, if any item in the <PRN> list is  
invalid, the entire list will be rejected. Error -222 will be generated.  
59551A  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:IGNore?  
Returns list of satellites to ignore.  
dd, ...  
This query returns a list of satellites to ignore for tracking. Each satellite is  
identified by its pseudorandom noise code (PRN). Zero (0) indicates no  
satellites being ignored.  
Response  
A value of 0 indicates no satellites being ignored. If any satellite is being  
ignored, the pseudorandom noise code (PRN) of the satellite is returned.  
Context Dependencies  
This query is always valid.  
5-18  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
GPS Satellite Acquisition  
Selecting Satellites _____________________________(continued)  
59551A  
:SYSTem:PRESet  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:INCLude . . .  
Adds the specified satellites to the list that the Receiver considers  
All satellites included  
for tracking.  
NON-VOLATILE  
This command adds the specified satellites to the list that the Receiver  
considers for tracking. Actual satellite selection is based on satellite visibility,  
geometry, and health.  
Expanded Syntax  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:INCLude <PRN>, . . ., <PRN>  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:INCLude:NONE  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:INCLude:ALL  
Parameter  
<PRN> parameter is the pseudorandom noise code of the satellite(s) you want  
the Receiver to include. Each satellite has its own unique PRN.  
Context Dependencies  
This command is always valid. On send, if any item in the <PRN> list is  
invalid, the entire list will be rejected. Error -222 will be generated.  
59551A  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:INCLude?  
Returns a list of satellites to include.  
dd, ...  
This query returns a list of satellites to include for tracking. Each satellite is  
identified by its pseudorandom noise code (PRN). Zero (0) indicates no  
satellites being included (i.e., the satellites are still on the ignored list).  
Context Dependencies  
This query is always valid.  
Operating and Programming Guide  
5-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
GPS Satellite Acquisition  
Selecting Satellites______________________________ (continued)  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:IGNore:COUNt?  
Returns the number of satellites that are on the list to ignore for  
tracking.  
dd  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:INClude:COUNt?  
Returns the number of satellites that are on the list to include for  
tracking.  
dd  
The query :GPS:SATellite:TRACking:IGNore:COUNt? returns the number of  
satellites that are on the list to ignore for tracking.  
The query :GPS:SATellite:TRACking:INClude:COUNt? returns the number of  
satellites that are on the list to be included for tracking.  
Response  
There may be some delay between changes made to the list of satellites being  
ignored and their actual removal and inclusion in the tracking process.  
At :SYSTem:PRESet, all satellites are put on the list to include for tracking.  
5-20  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
GPS Satellite Acquisition  
Selecting Satellites______________________________ (continued)  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:IGNore:STATe? . . .  
Returns the ignored status of individual satellites.  
0 or 1  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:INClude:STATe? . . .  
Returns the include status of the specified satellite.  
0 or 1  
The query :GPS:SATellite:TRACking:IGNore:STATe? returns the ignored  
status of the specified satellite. A satellite is specified by its pseudorandom  
noise code (PRN).  
The query :GPS:SATellite:TRACking:INClude:STATe? returns the include  
status of the specified satellite. A satellite is specified by its pseudorandom  
noise code (PRN).  
There may be some delay between changes made to the list of satellites being  
ignored and their actual removal and inclusion in the tracking process.  
Expanded Syntax  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:IGNore:STATe? <PRN>  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:INClude:STATe? <PRN>  
Parameter  
<PRN> parameter is the pseudorandom noise code of the satellite(s) you want  
the Receiver to ignore or include. Each satellite has its own unique PRN.  
Response  
A value of 0 indicates not on the selected list.  
A value of 1 indicates on the selected list.  
Context Dependencies  
After a :SYSTem:PRESet, all satellites are removed from the list to ignore.  
Operating and Programming Guide  
5-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
GPS Satellite Acquisition  
Compensating for Antenna Delay_________________________  
:SYSTem:PRESet  
:GPS:REFerence:ADELay . . .  
Sets the GPS antenna delay value in seconds.  
0.0  
NON-VOLATILE  
This command sets the GPS antenna delay value in seconds. It instructs the  
Receiver to output its 1 PPS output pulse earlier in time to compensate for  
antenna cable delay.  
CAUTION  
Using this command while the Receiver is in normal locked operation could  
cause the Receiver go into holdover.  
Expanded Syntax  
:GPS:REFerence:ADELay <numeric_value>  
Parameter  
Numeric_value range is 0 to 0 .000999999 seconds. The resolution is  
1 nanosecond.  
Zero cable delay is set for a zero-length antenna cable. Consult a cable data  
book for the delay per meter for the particular antenna cable used in order to  
compute the total cable delay needed for a particular installation.  
See Also  
:GPS:REFerence:ADELay?  
The tables below list the delay values that you need to use with the  
:GPS:REFERENCE:ADELAY <seconds> command for the available cable  
assemblies.  
Delay Values for the 58518A/519A and 58518AA/519AA RG-213 Antenna  
Cables  
Cable Option  
Length  
RG 213 or Belden 8267  
Antenna Delay  
Value  
001  
002  
005  
010  
015  
030  
050  
1m  
5.0 nanoseconds  
10.3 nanoseconds  
25.2 nanoseconds  
50.5 nanoseconds  
75.7 nanoseconds  
151.5 nanoseconds  
252.5 nanoseconds  
2 m  
5 m  
10 m  
15 m  
30 m  
50 m  
The nominal delay value is labeled on the cables. Refer to the Designing Your  
GPS Antenna System Configuration Guide for more information.  
5-22  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
GPS Satellite Acquisition  
Compensating for Antenna Delay_____________(continued)  
Delay Values for the 58520A/521A and 58520AA/521A LMR 400  
Antenna Cables  
Cable Option  
Length  
LMR 400 Antenna Delay Value  
001  
1m  
3.9 nanoseconds  
002  
2 m  
8.0 nanoseconds  
005  
5 m  
19.6 nanoseconds  
39.3 nanoseconds  
59.0 nanoseconds  
118.0 nanoseconds  
236.1 nanoseconds  
432.9 nanoseconds  
010  
10 m  
15 m  
30 m  
60 m  
110 m  
015  
030  
060  
110  
The nominal delay value is labeled on the cables. Refer to the Designing Your  
GPS Antenna System Configuration Guide for more information.  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
:GPS:REFerence:ADELay?  
Returns the GPS antenna delay value in seconds.  
d.dEe  
This query returns the GPS antenna delay value in seconds. This is the delay  
value set by the system installer (or the factory default). It is not a value  
measured by the Receiver.  
Response  
The time units are seconds.  
Operating and Programming Guide  
5-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
GPS Satellite Acquisition  
Monitoring Acquisition ___________________________________  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
:GPS:REFerence:VALid?  
Identifies whether the 1 PPS signal is valid.  
0 or 1  
This query identifies that the 1 PPS signal has locked to a valid GPS reference  
and the 1 PPS signal itself is valid.  
Response  
A value of 1 indicates signal is valid.  
A value of 0 indicates signal is not valid.  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking?  
Returns a list of all satellites being tracked.  
dd, ...  
This query returns a list of all satellites being tracked. Each satellite is  
identified by its pseudorandom noise code (PRN).  
Response  
A comma-separated list of satellite pseudorandom noise codes (<PRN>).  
The range of each <PRN> is 1 to 32.  
A response of 0 indicates no satellites being tracked.  
5-24  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
GPS Satellite Acquisition  
Monitoring Acquisition _________________________ (continued)  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
:GPS:SATellite:VISible:PREDicted?  
Returns the list of satellites (PRN) that the almanac predicts  
should be visible, given date, time, and location.  
dd, ...  
This query returns the list of satellites (PRN) that the almanac predicts should  
be visible, given date, time, and location (if any of these values are incorrect,  
the prediction will be incorrect). Each satellite is identified by its  
pseudorandom noise code (PRN).  
Response  
A comma-separated list of satellite pseudorandom noise codes (<PRN>).  
The range of each <PRN> is 1 to 32.  
A response of 0 indicates no satellites predicted visible.  
Theory  
Satellites must be in view to be tracked. At least four satellites must be in view,  
and tracked, to determine the position in position survey operation. Only one  
satellite must be in view, and tracked, to maintain operation of the reference  
oscillator locked to GPS when in position hold operation.  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:COUNt?  
Returns the number of satellites being tracked.  
dd  
This query returns the number of satellites being tracked.  
Response  
If there are no satellites being tracked, this query returns a 0.  
Operating and Programming Guide  
5-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
GPS Satellite Acquisition  
Monitoring Acquisition _________________________ (continued)  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
:GPS:SATellite:VISible:PREDicted:COUNt?  
Returns the number of satellites that the almanac predicts should  
be visible, given date, time, and location.  
dd  
This query returns the number of satellites that the almanac predicts should  
be visible, given date, time, and location (if any of these are incorrect, the  
prediction will be incorrect).  
Response  
Number of satellites predicted visible.  
Theory  
Satellites must be in view to be tracked. At least four satellites must be in view,  
and tracked, to determine the position in position survey operation. Only one  
satellite must be in view, and tracked, to maintain operation of the reference  
oscillator locked to GPS when in position hold operation.  
5-26  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
1 PPS Reference Synchronization  
1 PPS Reference Synchronization  
1 PPS and 10 MHz (58503B only) output signals are generated by the  
Receiver’s internal reference oscillator. This oscillator is synchronized  
(phased locked) to GPS while a sufficient number of satellites are tracked.  
When the GPS signal is interrupted or absent, the Receiver maintains timing  
and frequency accuracy through its oscillator “holdover” process. While in  
holdover, the frequency of the reference oscillator is adjusted as necessary to  
compensate for aging characteristics. The Receiver returns to “locked”  
operation through a “holdover recovery” process.  
The following commands are provided to monitor the operating mode of the  
reference oscillator, to determine the accuracy and stability of the reference  
output signal(s), and to control the oscillator holdover process.  
! Monitoring 1 PPS Synchronization  
:SYNChronization:STATe?  
:DIAGnostic:ROSCillator:EFControl:RELative?  
:LED:GPSLock?  
:LED:HOLDover?  
! Assessing 1 PPS Quality  
:SYNChronization:FFOMerit?  
:SYNChronization:HOLDover:TUNCertainty:PREDicted?  
:SYNChronization:HOLDover:TUNCertainty:PRESent?  
:SYNChronization:TFOMerit?  
:SYNChronization:TINTerval?  
:SYNChronization:HOLDover:DURation?  
:SYNChronization:HOLDover:DURation:THReshold ...  
:SYNChronization:HOLDover:DURation:THReshold?  
:SYNChronization:HOLDover:DURation:THReshold:EXCeeded?  
! Operating in Holdover  
" Initiating Manual Holdover  
:SYNChronization:HOLDover:INITiate  
" Recovering from Holdover  
:SYNChronization:HOLDover:WAITing?  
:SYNChronization:HOLDover:RECovery:INITiate  
:SYNChronization:HOLDover:RECovery:LIMit:IGNore  
:SYNChronization:IMMediate  
Operating and Programming Guide  
5-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
1 PPS Reference Synchronization  
Monitoring 1 PPS Synchronization _______________________  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
:SYNChronization:STATe?  
Returns the Receiver state.  
XYZ  
This query returns the Receiver state.  
Response  
OFF, or HOLD, or WAIT, or REC, or LOCK, or POW.  
OFF indicates in diagnostic mode or a temporary start-up mode; HOLD  
indicates in manual holdover; WAIT indicates waiting for external conditions  
to allow recovery from holdover; REC indicates actively recovering from  
holdover; LOCK indicates locked to GPS; POW indicates in powerup prior to  
first lock.  
Context Dependencies  
:SYSTem:PRESet sets the state to POWerup.  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
:DIAGnostic:ROSCillator:EFControl:RELative?  
Returns the Electronic Frequency Control (EFC) output value of  
the internal reference oscillator.  
d.dEe  
This query returns the Electronic Frequency Control (EFC) output value of the  
internal reference oscillator. It returns a percentage value.  
Response  
Range is -100% to +100%.  
5-28  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
1 PPS Reference Synchronization  
Monitoring 1 PPS Synchronization _____________ (continued)  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
:LED:GPSLock?  
Returns the state of the front-panel GPS Lock LED.  
0 or 1  
This query returns the state of the front-panel GPS Lock LED. The Receiver  
sets this indicator during normal operation when it has locked the internal  
reference oscillator and 1 PPS output to GPS.  
Response  
A value of 0 indicates the LED is off.  
A value of 1 indicates the LED is on.  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
:LED:HOLDover?  
Returns the state of the front–panel Holdover LED.  
0 or 1  
This query returns the state of the front-panel Holdover LED. The Receiver  
sets this indicator when in holdover operation.  
Response  
A value of 0 indicates the LED is off.  
A value of 1 indicates the LED is on.  
Operating and Programming Guide  
5-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
1 PPS Reference Synchronization  
Assessing 1 PPS Quality__________________________________  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
:SYNChronization:FFOMerit?  
Returns the Frequency Figure of Merit.  
dd  
This query returns the Frequency Figure of Merit (FFOM). Use this query  
when you want to know the stability of the Receiver’s 10 MHz output.  
The 10 MHz output is controlled by the SmartClock’s Phase-Locked Loop  
(PLL). Thus, the FFOM value is determined by monitoring the status of  
the PLL.  
Response  
The following table lists and defines the FFOM values (0 thru 3) that could be  
returned.  
FFOM Value Definition  
0
1
2
PLL stabilized—10 MHz output within specification.  
PLL stabilizing  
PLL unlocked (holdover)—Initially the 10 MHz output will be  
within specifications. However, when in holdover, the 10 MHz  
output will eventually drift out of specification.  
3
PLL unlocked (not in holdover)—Do not use the output.  
5-30  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
1 PPS Reference Synchronization  
Assessing 1 PPS Quality ________________________ (continued)  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
:SYNChronization:HOLDover:TUNCertainty:PREDicted?  
Returns an estimate of the time interval error that can be expected  
for a one day holdover, given the current state of SmartClock  
learning in the Receiver.  
d.dEe, 0 or 1  
This query returns an estimate of the time interval error that can be expected  
for a one day holdover, given the current state of SmartClock learning in the  
Receiver.  
Response  
The first number in the response is the estimated time interval error. The units  
are seconds, the resolution is 100 nanoseconds.  
The second number in the response identifies the holdover state. A value of 0  
indicates the Receiver is not in holdover; a value of 1 indicates the Receiver is  
in holdover.  
Context Dependencies  
This query is not valid prior to first lock following powerup (see bit 2 of the  
Powerup Status Register) or :SYSTem:PRESet. Sending this query before first  
lock will generate error -230.  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
:SYNChronization:HOLDover:TUNCertainty:PRESent?  
Returns the current time interval error during holdover operation,  
given the current state of SmartClock learning in the Receiver.  
d.dEe  
This query returns the current time error during holdover operation, given the  
current state of SmartClock learning in the Receiver.  
Response  
The time error units are seconds.  
Context Dependencies  
This query is valid when the Receiver is in holdover. If not in holdover,  
error -230 is generated.  
Operating and Programming Guide  
5-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
1 PPS Reference Synchronization  
Assessing 1 PPS Quality ________________________ (continued)  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
:SYNChronization:TFOMerit?  
Returns the Time Figure of Merit.  
dd  
This query returns the Time Figure of Merit. Use this query when you want to  
know the accuracy of the Receiver’s 1 PPS output. A low TFOM value indicates  
a more accurate output. A value of 3 indicates that the Time Error ranges from  
100 to 1000 nanoseconds.  
Response  
The following table lists the TFOM values that could be returned and provides  
the corresponding Time Error.  
TFOM Value Time Error  
(in nanoseconds)  
TFOM Value Time Error  
(in nanoseconds)  
0*  
1*  
2*  
3
less than 1  
5
6
7
8
9
10 –10  
4
5
5
6
7
8
1–10  
10 –10  
6
10–100  
100–1000  
10 –10  
7
10 –10  
3
4
8
4
10 –10  
greater than 10  
* The TFOM values 0, 1, and 2 are not presently used in the 58503B and 59551A products. The  
58503B and 59551A products will display TFOM values ranging from 9 to 3, which is consistent with  
the specified accuracies of each product  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
:SYNChronization:TINTerval?  
Returns the difference or timing shift between the SmartClock 1  
PPS and the GPS 1 PPS signals.  
d.dEe  
This query returns the difference or timing shift between the SmartClock  
1 PPS and the GPS 1 PPS signals. It generates an error when this interval is  
unavailable (That is, if no GPS 1 PPS).  
Response  
Time interval units are seconds.  
Resolution is 1E-10 seconds.  
5-32  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
1 PPS Reference Synchronization  
Assessing 1 PPS Quality ________________________ (continued)  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
:SYNChronization:HOLDover:DURation?  
Returns the duration of the present or most recent period of  
operation in the holdover and holdover processes.  
d.dEe, 0 or 1  
This query returns the duration of the present or most recent period of  
operation in the holdover and holdover processes. This is the length of time the  
reference oscillator was not locked to GPS. The time units are seconds.  
Response  
The first number in the response is the holdover duration. The duration units  
are seconds, and the resolution is 1 second.  
If the Receiver is in holdover, the response quantifies the current holdover  
duration. If the Receiver is not in holdover, the response quantifies the  
previous holdover.  
The second number in the response identifies the holdover state. A value of 0  
indicates the Receiver is not in holdover; a value of 1 indicates the Receiver is  
in holdover.  
Context Dependencies  
This query is always valid. If this query is sent before the first holdover has  
occurred, the response will be 0,0, indicating that the Receiver is currently not  
in holdover and last holdover duration was 0 seconds (user infers there has not  
been one yet).  
Set to 0,0 after a :SYSTem:PRESet. If there was a prior holdover, the duration  
will be lost.  
Operating and Programming Guide  
5-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
1 PPS Reference Synchronization  
Assessing 1 PPS Quality ________________________ (continued)  
:SYSTem:PRESet  
:SYNChronization:HOLDover:DURation:THReshold . . .  
Sets the duration (in seconds) to be used as a limit each time  
holdover begins.  
86400  
(i.e., 1 day)  
NON-VOLATILE  
This command sets the duration (in seconds) which represents a limit against  
which the elapsed time of holdover is compared. If the elapsed time in holdover  
(and associated processes) exceeds the limit, a flag is set. The flag indicating  
the limit is exceeded can be queried using the  
:SYNC:HOLD:DUR:THR:EXCeeded? query.  
Expanded Syntax  
:SYNChronization:HOLDover:DURation:THReshold <seconds>  
Parameter  
Resolution of the <seconds> parameter is 1 second.  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
:SYNChronization:HOLDover:DURation:THReshold?  
Returns the duration (in seconds) which represents a limit against  
which the elapsed time of holdover is compared.  
dd  
This query returns the duration (in seconds) which represents a limit against  
which the elapsed time of holdover is compared. If the elapsed time of holdover  
(and associated processes) exceeds the limit, a flag is set.  
Expanded Syntax  
:SYNChronization:HOLDover:DURation:THReshold?  
Response  
The threshold units are seconds.  
The resolution is 1 second  
5-34  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
1 PPS Reference Synchronization  
Assessing 1 PPS Quality ________________________ (continued)  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
:SYNChronization:HOLDover:DURation:THReshold  
:EXCeeded?  
Identifies if the Receiver has been in holdover longer than the  
amount of time specified by the THReshold command.  
0 or 1  
This query identifies if the Receiver has been in holdover longer than the  
amount of time specified by the THReshold command. If it has, 1 will be  
returned.  
Response  
A value of 1 indicates that the Receiver is in holdover, and has been operating  
in holdover for a duration that exceeds the specified duration.  
The value 0 indicates either the Receiver is not in holdover, or it has been in  
holdover for less than the specified duration.  
Operating and Programming Guide  
5-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
1 PPS Reference Synchronization  
Operating in Holdover ____________________________________  
" Initiating Manual Holdover __________________________________  
:SYNChronization:HOLDover:INITiate  
Places the Receiver in holdover mode.  
EVENT  
This command places the Receiver in holdover mode. The Receiver will stay in  
holdover until you send :SYNC:HOLD:REC:INIT.  
Context Dependencies  
This command is not valid prior to the first lock following powerup (see bit 2 of  
the Powerup Status Register) or :SYSTem:PRESet. Sending this command  
before the first lock will generate error -221.  
See Also  
:SYNChronization:HOLDover:RECovery:INITiate  
5-36  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
1 PPS Reference Synchronization  
Operating in Holdover __________________________ (continued)  
" Recovering from Holdover _________________________________  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
:SYNChronization:HOLDover:WAITing?  
Returns prioritized reason for why the Receiver is waiting to  
recover.  
XYZ  
This query returns prioritized reason for why the Receiver is waiting to  
recover.  
Response  
HARD indicates there is an internal hardware reason, GPS indicates there are  
no satellites, LIM indicates the time interval between GPS and internal  
oscillator is exceeding the limit, and NONE indicates the Receiver isn’t waiting  
to recover.  
Note that if holdover has been initiated by sending the :SYNC:HOLD:INIT  
command, the Receiver is not waiting to recover; the response is NONE.  
This query is always valid. If not in holdover and waiting to recover, NONE will  
be the response.  
:SYNChronization:HOLDover:RECovery:INITiate  
Initiates a recovery from manually initiated holdover.  
EVENT  
This command initiates a recovery from manually initiated holdover. Use this  
command to take the Receiver out of a manually selected holdover. This  
command is not needed to initiate holdover recovery in any other situation.  
See Also  
:SYNChronization:HOLDover:INITiate  
Operating and Programming Guide  
5-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
1 PPS Reference Synchronization  
Operating in Holdover __________________________ (continued)  
" Recovering from Holdover (continued)  
:SYNChronization:HOLDover:RECovery:LIMit:IGNore  
Initiates recovery from holdover if recovery was inhibited by time  
intervals exceeding limit.  
EVENT  
This command initiates recovery from holdover if recovery was inhibited by  
time intervals exceeding limit.  
The time interval used for this comparison is the time interval between the  
internal oscillator’s 1 PPS edge and the GPS system’s 1 PPS edge. When this  
time interval consistently exceeds the specified limit, the instrument enters  
the holdover state, “Waiting to Recover.”  
Recovery is initiated when the time intervals consistently fall within limits,  
or when the limit is ignored by issuing this command.  
:SYNChronization:IMMediate  
Initiates a near-instantaneous alignment of the GPS 1 PPS and  
Receiver output 1 PPS if the command is issued during recovery  
from holdover.  
EVENT  
This command initiates a near-instantaneous alignment of the GPS 1 PPS and  
Receiver output 1 PPS if the command is issued during recovery from holdover.  
Context Dependencies  
This command is only valid when recovering from holdover. See bit 2 of the  
Holdover Status Register (if it is 1, this command is okay). Sending this  
command when the Receiver is not recovering will generate error -221.  
5-38  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Operating Status  
Operating Status  
This section describes the commands that can be use to obtain Receiver status  
information. There are several ways to obtain Receiver status using  
commands. For example, you can send a command to display the Receiver  
Status screen, to read the error queue, and to read the diagnostic log. You can  
also send a sequence of commands to read and control the status registers for  
alarm generation.  
This section defines all of the commands used for status reporting.  
A comprehensive discussion on how you can monitor and control alarm  
conditions using the status registers is included.  
! Receiver Operation at a Glance  
:SYSTem:STATus?  
:SYSTem:STATus:LENGth?  
! Reading the Error Queue  
:SYSTem:ERRor?  
! Reading the Diagnostic Log  
:DIAGnostic:LOG:CLEar  
:DIAGnostic:LOG:READ:ALL?  
:DIAGnostic:LOG:CLEar ...  
:DIAGnostic:LOG:COUNt?  
:DIAGnostic:LOG:READ?  
:DIAGnostic:LOG:READ? ...  
! Monitoring Status/Alarm Conditions  
" Clearing and Presetting Alarms  
*CLS  
:STATus:PRESet:ALARm  
" Reading and Qualifying Alarms  
:LED:ALARm?  
*SRE ...  
*SRE?  
*STB?  
Operating and Programming Guide  
5-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Operating Status  
" Reading and Qualifying Receiver Status  
<register> = OPERation  
<register> = QUEStionable  
<register> = OPERation:HARDware  
<register> = OPERation:HOLDover  
<register> = OPERation:POWerup  
:STATus:<register>:CONDition?  
:STATus:<register>:EVENt?  
:STATus:<register>:ENABle ...  
:STATus:<register>:ENABle?  
:STATus:<register>:NTRansition ...  
:STATus:<register>:NTRansition?  
:STATus:<register>:PTRansition ...  
:STATus:<register>:PTRansition?  
" Reading and Qualifying Command Error Status  
*ESE ...  
*ESE?  
*ESR?  
" Reporting Questionable Status  
:STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition:USER ...  
:STATus:QUEStionable:EVENt:USER ...  
! Assessing Receiver Health  
*TST?  
:DIAGnostic:LIFetime:COUNt?  
:DIAGnostic:TEST? ...  
:DIAGnostic:TEST:RESult?  
5-40  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Operating Status  
Receiver Operation at a Glance ___________________________  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
:SYSTem:STATus?  
Outputs a formatted status screen.  
ASCII Data  
This query outputs a formatted Receiver Status screen. Use this screen to  
monitor GPS acquisition, derivation of time and position, and synchronization  
of reference outputs to GPS.  
Refer to Chapter 3, “Visual User Interface,” for detailed information on the  
Receiver Status screen.  
Response  
Sending this command will display a status screen similar to the following  
figure (58503B screen is shown in this figure).  
Receiver Status  
----------------------------  
SYNCHRONIZATION..........................................  
----------------------------  
]
[
Reference Outputs  
Outputs Valid  
SmartClock Mode  
>>  
Locked to GPS  
TFOM  
3
FFOM  
0
Recovery  
Holdover  
Power-up  
1PPS TI +7.2 ns relative to GPS  
HOLD THR 1.000 us  
Holdover Uncertainty  
Predict 49.0 us/initial 24 hrs  
................................................[GPS 1PPS Valid]  
Not Tracking: 1  
ACQUISITION  
Tracking: 6  
PRN El Az C/N PRN El Az  
Time  
UTC  
+1 leap second pending  
23:59:59 31 Dec 1995  
2 49 243 49  
16 24 282 44  
18 38 154 49  
19 65 52 43  
27 62 327 44  
31 34 61 38  
14 11 82  
GPS 1PPS Synchronized to UTC  
ANT DLY 120 ns  
Position  
MODE  
Survey: 17.5% complete  
AVG LAT N 37:19:32.264  
AVG LON W 121:59:52.112  
AVG HGT  
......................................................  
+41.86 m (GPS)  
[ OK ]  
ELEV MASK 10 deg  
HEALTH MONITOR  
Self Test: OK Int Pwr: OK Oven Pwr: OK  
OCXO: OK EFC: OK GPS Rcv: OK  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
:SYSTem:STATus:LENGth?  
Returns the number of lines of formatted text that are in the  
Receiver Status screen.  
dd  
This query returns the number of lines of formatted text that are in the  
Receiver Status screen.  
Operating and Programming Guide  
5-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Operating Status  
Reading the Error Queue _________________________________  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
:SYSTem:ERRor?  
Returns the oldest error in the Error Queue and removes that error  
from the queue (first in, first out).  
dd,“XYZ”  
This query returns the oldest error in the Error Queue and removes that error  
from the queue (first in, first out).  
See Appendix A, “Error Messages,” in this guide for detailed error information.  
Response  
The error response format is: <error_number>, “<error_description>”, where  
The <error_number> is an integer transferred as ASCII bytes in  
<NR1>format (integer). The range is -32768 to 32767.  
Negative error numbers are defined by the SCPI standard.  
Positive error numbers are defined specifically for this Receiver.  
An error number value of zero indicates that the Error Queue is empty.  
The maximum length of the <error_description> is 255 characters.  
Context Dependencies  
:SYSTem:PRESet clears the Error Queue.  
The queue is cleared (emptied) on *CLS, power-on, or upon reading the last  
error from the queue.  
If the Error Queue overflows, the last error in the queue is replaced with the  
error -350, "Queue overflow". Any time the queue overflows, the least recent  
errors remain in the queue and the most recent error is discarded.  
The maximum length of the Error Queue is 30.  
5-42  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Operating Status  
Reading the Diagnostic Log ______________________________  
The Diagnostic Log is one way to obtain Receiver status.  
The following activities and events are recorded in the diagnostic log:  
power-on sequence,  
automatic or manual transitions between locked, and holdover,  
automatic or manual transitions between position survey and position  
hold operation,  
alarm indications, and  
self-test failures.  
Each entry is date-and-time tagged. The log entries are stored in non-volatile  
memory so all data remains valid even if power is lost. Access to the diagnostic  
log entries is through commands in the :DIAGnostic:LOG subtree.  
For example, to read the first diagnostic log entry, use the command  
:DIAG:LOG:READ? 1  
The possible log messages that can be displayed on your computer display are  
listed in the following table.  
Table 5-1. Diagnostic Log Messages  
Log Message  
Comments  
Log cleared  
Always becomes first log message when the log is cleared.  
See :DIAG:LOG:CLEAR.  
Power on  
Indicates Receiver has been powered on.  
Indicates Receiver processor has re-booted.  
Indicates beginning of survey for position.  
Indicates transition from survey to position hold.  
Indicates transition into locked operation.  
Re-boot  
Survey mode started  
Position hold mode started  
GPS lock started  
GPS reference valid at  
yyyymmdd.hh:mm:ss  
Indicates when GPS reference first become valid. Time in log is the present  
time from GPS.  
Holdover started, manual  
Indicates transition to holdover based on user request. See  
:SYNC:HOLD:INIT.  
Holdover started, TI error  
Indicates transition to holdover due to problem detected with Receiver  
ability to properly measure interval between GPS 1 PPS and internal  
oscillator 1 PPS.  
Holdover started, TI limit exceeded  
Holdover started, not tracking GPS  
Indicates transition to holdover due to the interval from GPS 1 PPS to  
internal oscillator 1 PPS exceeding a limit threshold for numerous  
measurements.  
Indicates transition to holdover since GPS is not tracking sufficient  
satellites.  
Operating and Programming Guide  
5-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Operating Status  
Reading the Diagnostic Log ____________________ (continued)  
Table 5-1. Diagnostic Log Messages (Continued)  
Log Message  
Comments  
Holdover started, GPS RAIM alarm  
Indicates transition to holdover since time RAIM algorithm has detected  
GPS 1PPS timing inaccuracy.  
Holdover started, GPS Alarm  
Holdover started, invalid GPS 1 PPS  
Holdover started, GPS  
Indicates transition to holdover due to GPS engine communication failure.  
Indicates transition to holdover due to problem with the GPS 1 PPS signal.  
Indicates transition to holdover due to some other GPS problem.  
Indicates transition to holdover due to internal hardware error.  
Holdover started, HW error  
Holdover started, temporary  
Indicates temporary transition to holdover due to changing of certain  
settings.  
Holdover started  
Self-test failed  
System preset  
Hardware failure  
Indicates transition to holdover for any reason not covered above.  
Indicates self-test failed on powerup.  
Indicates that the Receiver has been preset to factory settings.  
Indicates that a hardware failure has been detected. See Hardware Status  
Register for details.  
EEPROM save failed  
Indicates that an attempt to save information to the EEPROM has failed.  
The DIAGnostic commands for the log are described in the following text.  
5-44  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Operating Status  
Reading the Diagnostic Log _____________________  
(continued)  
:SYSTem:PRESet  
:DIAGnostic:LOG:CLEar  
Clears the diagnostic log.  
Log is cleared  
NON-VOLATILE  
This command is an event that removes all previous diagnostic log entries, and  
effectively sets the number of diagnostic log entries to one.  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
:DIAGnostic:LOG:READ:ALL?  
Returns all of the most recent diagnostic log entries.  
“XYZ”, ...  
This query returns all of the most recent diagnostic log entries.  
:SYSTem:PRESet  
Log is cleared  
:DIAGnostic:LOG:CLEar . . .  
Clears only the current diagnostic log.  
NON-VOLATILE  
This command clears the diagnostic log. The optional log count parameter is  
provided to ensure that no log entries are unread at the time of the clear.  
Expanded Syntax  
:DIAGnostic:LOG:CLEar <current log size>  
Parameter  
If the value sent for the optional log parameter does not match the current log  
entry count (use :DIAG:LOG:COUN? to obtain this number), the clear will not  
take place.  
Context Dependencies  
This command is always valid. If the optional log count parameter is sent, and  
the current and actual log count does not match log count value, the clear will  
not be performed and error -222 will be generated.  
Operating and Programming Guide  
5-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Operating Status  
Reading the Diagnostic Log _____________________  
(continued)  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
dd  
:DIAGnostic:LOG:COUNt?  
Identifies the number of entries in the diagnostic log.  
This query identifies the number of entries in the diagnostic log.  
Response  
Range is 1 to 222, maximum is subject to change.  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
:DIAGnostic:LOG:READ?  
Returns the most recent diagnostic log entry.  
“XYZ”  
This query returns the most recent diagnostic log entry.  
Response  
The diagnostic log entry format is: “Log NNN: YYYYMMDD.HH:MM:SS:  
<log_message>”, where:  
Log indicates a diagnostic log entry, and NNN is the log entry number  
YYYYMMDD.HH:MM:SS is the date and time of the diagnostic log entry.  
The <log_message> is a sequence of up to 255 characters.  
5-46  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Operating Status  
Reading the Diagnostic Log _____________________  
(continued)  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
“XYZ”  
:DIAGnostic:LOG:READ? . . .  
Returns the user-specified diagnostic log entry. Returns the most  
recent diagnostic log entry if no parameter is supplied.  
This query returns the user-specified diagnostic log entry.  
Expanded Syntax  
:DIAGnostic:LOG:READ? <entry number>  
Parameter  
Range is 1 to current log count.  
Response  
The diagnostic log entry format is: “Log NNN: YYYYMMDD.HH:MM:SS:  
<log_message>”, where:  
Log indicates a diagnostic log entry, and NNN is the log entry number  
YYYYMMDD.HH:MM:SS is the date and time of the diagnostic log entry.  
The <log_message> is a sequence of up to 255 characters.  
Context Dependencies  
This query is always valid. If no log message is associated with the requested  
log number, error -222 is generated.  
Operating and Programming Guide  
5-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Operating Status  
Monitoring Status/Alarm Conditions _____________________  
The Receiver is at all times monitoring various operating conditions through a  
status/alarm reporting system. The Receiver is shipped from the factory with  
the status system set to generate an alarm under a default set of operating  
conditions.  
The monitored operating conditions are organized by function into three major  
groups: Questionable status, Command Error status, and Operation status.  
The Operation status group has three functional subgroups: Powerup status,  
Holdover status, and Hardware status.  
All of the operating conditions are summarized by the Alarm status.  
Figure 5-1, on the next page, includes the identification of the default alarm  
conditions. Those conditions which are enabled to “feed” all the way through  
the system will generate an alarm in a Receiver configured with the factory  
defaults. (Note a diagram identical to Figure 5-1 is provides as part of the  
Receiver Commands at a Glance (cont’d)/Status Reporting System at a Glance  
foldout—pages 4-17 and 4-18, respectively.)  
5-48  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Operating Status  
Monitoring Status/Alarm Conditions ___________ (continued)  
Questionable  
Binary Weights  
"OR"  
0
1
Time Reset  
User-reported  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
8
9
256  
512  
2
4
10 1024  
11 2048  
12 4096  
13 8192  
14 16384  
15 32768  
Alarm  
8
16  
32  
64  
128  
not used  
not used  
not used  
Command Error  
not used  
"OR"  
not used  
3
Questionable Summary  
not used  
Query Error  
Hardware/Firmware Error  
Semantic Error  
Syntactic Error  
not used  
2
3
4
5
"OR"  
Alarm  
5
6
7
Command Error Summary  
Master Summary  
Operation Summary  
Power Cycled  
7
Powerup  
First Satellite Tracked  
Oscillator Oven Warm  
Date & Time Valid  
Operation  
Powerup Summary  
Locked  
Holdover Summary  
Position Hold  
1 PPS Reference Valid  
Hardware Summary  
Log Almost Full  
"OR"  
"OR"  
0
1
2
0
1
2
"OR"  
3
Holdover  
4
5
0
1
2
3
Holding  
6
Waiting to Recover  
Recovering  
Exceeding Threshold  
Hardware  
0
1
2
3
4
Selftest Failure  
+15V Supply Exceeds Tolerance  
-15V Supply Exceeds Tolerance  
+5V Supply Exceeds Tolerance  
Oven Supply Exceeds Tolerance  
not used  
"OR"  
Shading identifies  
summary bit.  
6
7
EFC Voltage Near Full-Scale  
EFC Voltage Full-Scale  
GPS 1 PPS Failure  
Powerup Summary  
8
9
10  
11  
12  
Default Transition Filter  
Default Event Enable  
GPS Failure  
False-to-true (positive)  
transition latches event.  
Event enabled to report to  
summary bit.  
TI Measurement Failed  
EEPROM Write Failed  
Internal Reference Failure  
Not applicable  
Event disabled  
Figure 5-1. 59551A/58503B Status Reporting System Diagram  
Operating and Programming Guide  
5-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Operating Status  
Monitoring Status/Alarm Conditions ___________ (continued)  
The following describes, for each functional group of operating status shown in  
Figure 5-1, each of the operating conditions that is monitored through the  
status/alarm system.  
Each monitored condition bit is “set” (to one) when the named condition is true  
and “cleared” (to zero) when the named condition is false.  
Each monitored event bit is set when the named event has occurred and  
cleared at powerup and when the user executes a command which reads or  
clears the event register.  
All of the conditions and events are cleared at powerup and :SYSTem:PRESet.  
Alarm Status  
The Alarm Status summarizes condition changes from the three major  
functional status groups (Questionable, Command Error, and Operation).  
The Questionable Summary condition (bit 3) reflects one or more latched  
condition changes in the Questionable status group.  
The Command Error Summary condition (bit 5) reflects one or more  
latched condition changes in the Command Error status group.  
The Master Summary condition (bit 6) indicates that there was at least  
one reason for generating an Alarm.  
The Operation Summary condition (bit 7) reflects one or more latched  
condition changes in the Operation status group.  
Operation Status  
The Operation Status is comprised of the Operation subgroup (Powerup,  
Holdover, and Hardware) summaries, Locked, Position Hold, 1 PPS Reference  
Valid, and Log Almost Full status.  
The Powerup Summary condition (bit 0) reflects one or more latched  
condition changes in the Powerup status group.  
The Locked condition (bit 1) indicates whether or not the Receiver is  
locked to GPS.  
The Holdover Summary condition (bit 2) reflects one or more latched  
condition changes in the Holdover status group.  
The Position Hold condition (bit 3) indicates whether the Receiver is in  
position hold or survey mode.  
The 1 PPS Reference Valid condition (bit 4) indicates that the GPS 1 PPS  
signal is suitable to use as a locking reference.  
The Hardware Summary condition (bit 5) reflects one or more latched  
condition changes in the Hardware status group.  
The Log Almost Full condition (bit 6) indicates whether or not the  
diagnostic log is approaching the point where new entries will no longer be  
logged.  
5-50  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Operating Status  
Monitoring Status/Alarm Conditions ___________ (continued)  
Hardware Status  
This Operation subgroup comprises operating status that indicates the health  
of the Receiver hardware.  
One or more of the condition changes from this group are summarized in the  
Operation Status group.  
The Selftest Failure condition (bit 0) indicates whether a failure was  
detected during the powerup or last user-initiated self-test.  
The following conditions reflect the status of specific hardware that is  
continuously monitored by the Receiver:  
(bit 1)  
(bit 2)  
(bit 3)  
(bit 4)  
(bit 6)  
(bit 7)  
(bit 8)  
(bit 9)  
(bit 10)  
(bit 12)  
+15V Supply Exceeds Tolerance condition  
15V Supply Exceeds Tolerance condition  
+5V Supply Exceeds Tolerance condition  
Oven Supply Exceeds Tolerance condition  
EFC Voltage Near Full-Scale condition  
EFC Voltage Full-Scale condition  
GPS 1 PPS Failure condition  
GPS Failure condition  
Time Interval Measurement Failed event  
Internal Reference Failure condition  
The EEPROM Write Failed event (bit 11) indicates that an attempt to  
write to the non-volatile memory failed.  
Operating and Programming Guide  
5-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Operating Status  
Monitoring Status/Alarm Conditions ___________ (continued)  
Holdover Status  
This Operation subgroup is comprised of operating status that occurs during  
holdover.  
One or more of the condition changes from this group are summarized in the  
Operation Status group.  
The following conditions indicate that the Receiver is in holdover, and the  
specific holdover state:  
(bit 0)  
(bit 1)  
(bit 2)  
Holding condition  
Waiting to Recover condition  
Recovering condition  
The Exceeding User-Threshold condition (bit 3) indicates whether or not  
the user-specified holdover duration  
(:SYNC:HOLDover:DURation:THReshold) is being exceeded.  
Powerup Status  
This Operation subgroup is comprised of operating status that occurs at  
powerup.  
One or more of the condition changes from this group are summarized in the  
Operation Status group.  
The First Satellite Tracked condition (bit 0) is cleared at powerup and set  
when the first satellite becomes tracked following powerup.  
The Oscillator Oven Warm condition (bit 1) is cleared at powerup and set  
when the internal oscillator has warmed up following powerup.  
The Date & Time Valid event (bit 2) is cleared at powerup and set when  
the date and time are set during the first lock is attained after powerup.  
Questionable Status  
The Time Reset status event (bit 0) indicates that the Receiver reset its time  
because the Receiver's time was found to be different from the time being  
reported by the satellites. This could occur after an extensive holdover period.  
The User-reported condition (bit 1) indicates the setting reported by the user  
with the :STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition:USER or  
:STATus:QUEStionable:EVENt:USER command. This is the only condition in  
the status/alarm reporting that the user can directly affect.  
5-52  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Operating Status  
Monitoring Status/Alarm Conditions ___________ (continued)  
Command Error Status  
This group contains events which indicate a command error has occurred, and  
an event which indicates that the power has cycled. (See Figure 5-1.)  
The following status events indicate that a command error occurred:  
The Query Error status event (bit 2). Errors -400 through -499 are query  
errors.  
The Hardware/Firmware Error status event (bit 3). Errors -300 through  
-399 are hardware/firmware errors.  
The Semantic Error status event (bit 4). Errors -200 through -299 are  
semantic errors.  
The Syntactic Error status event (bit 5). Errors -100 through -199 are  
syntactic errors.  
The Power Cycled status event (bit 7) is set at powerup.  
Operating and Programming Guide  
5-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Operating Status  
Monitoring Status/Alarm Conditions ___________ (continued)  
! Clearing and Presetting Alarms ______________________________  
*CLS  
Clears the current alarm and prepares the Receiver for the next  
alarm activation.  
EVENT  
When the *CLS command clears the event status registers and error queue, the  
Receiver’s Alarm LED and Alarm BITE output will no longer indicate that  
there was a reason to alarm. Furthermore, the Receiver is then ready to detect  
a new alarm.  
Context Dependencies  
In the 59551A, the error queue (and corresponding serial port prompt) of the  
I/O port which transmitted *CLS will be cleared.  
Side Effects  
The Alarm LED is extinguished.  
The Alarm BITE output is set “inactive/off.”  
The prompt of the serial I/O port (which transmits *CLS) reflects error queue  
clearing.  
The event status registers are cleared.  
The error queue (and corresponding serial port prompt) of the I/O port which  
transmitted *CLS will be cleared.  
Theory  
The *CLS command clears the event status registers and error queue.  
(They are also cleared at power-up.)  
Since the Alarm Condition register summarizes the event registers, it is  
cleared as a result of the clearing of all of the event registers.  
The alarm remains active even after the condition that caused it has gone  
away.  
If the condition that caused the alarm to occur is still set, a new alarm cannot  
be detected until the condition clears and resets.  
This command has no effect on condition, enable, or transition filter registers.  
5-54  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Operating Status  
Monitoring Status/Alarm Conditions ___________ (continued)  
! Clearing and Presetting Alarms (continued)  
:STATus:PRESet:ALARm  
Presets the status/alarm reporting system to generate an alarm  
when a factory default set of operating conditions occurs.  
EVENT  
When the configurable portion of the status/alarm reporting system is preset,  
the Receiver is configured to generate an alarm under the factory default set of  
operating conditions.  
Use this command to restore only the status/alarm reporting system to the  
factory (:SYSTem:PRESet) settings.  
Theory  
The configurable portion of the status/alarm reporting system consists of  
enable and transition filter registers. Figure 5-1 identifies the factory default  
enables and transitions.  
The status/alarm reporting configuration is stored in non-volatile memory.  
This command performs a subset of the :SYSTem:PRESet command in that it  
only presets the configuration associated with status/alarm reporting system.  
This command does not affect condition or event registers.  
Operating and Programming Guide  
5-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Operating Status  
Monitoring Status/Alarm Conditions ___________ (continued)  
! Reading and Qualifying Alarms _____________________________  
Alarm  
Condition  
Register  
not used  
not used  
not used  
3
Questionable Summary  
not used  
STB?  
*
5
6
Command Error Summary  
Master Summary  
"AND"  
7
Operation Summary  
&
Alarm  
Enable  
Register  
"OR"  
:LED:ALARm?  
&
&
Alarm  
not used  
not used  
not used  
3
5
7
Questionable Summary  
not used  
SRE <bit mask>  
SRE?  
*
*
Command Error Summary  
not used  
Operation Summary  
Figure 5-2. Alarm Condition and Enable Registers  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
:LED:ALARm?  
Returns the status of the front-panel Alarm LED.  
0 or 1  
This query returns the status of the front-panel Alarm LED, which indicates  
that a change in operating conditions was recorded. The alarm remains active  
even after the condition that caused it has gone away.  
Theory  
This query essentially reads the Master Summary bit (bit 6) of the Alarm  
Condition Register.  
At power-up, the alarm status is cleared.  
5-56  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Operating Status  
Monitoring Status/Alarm Conditions ___________ (continued)  
! Reading and Qualifying Alarms (continued)  
:SYSTem:PRESet  
*SRE . . .  
Sets the Alarm Enable Register.  
136  
NON-VOLATILE  
The setting of the Alarm Enable Register (Figure 5-2) selects which summary  
status from the Alarm Condition Register is enabled to generate an alarm.  
Expanded Syntax  
*SRE <bit mask>  
Semantics  
The <bit mask> has a range of 0 to 255.  
The <bit mask> value represents the sum of the binary-weighted values of the  
register. Attempts to set unused bits in the register are ignored—the value of  
unused bits is zero.  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
*SRE?  
Identifies the status conditions enabled to generate an alarm.  
dd  
This query identifies the status conditions enabled to generate an alarm.  
Reading the Alarm Enable Register identifies which summary status from the  
Alarm Condition Register is enabled to generate an alarm.  
Response  
The range is 0 to 255.  
The response value represents the sum of the binary-weighted values of the  
register. The value of unused bits is zero.  
Theory  
Reading/Querying the Alarm Enable Register does not change its contents.  
Operating and Programming Guide  
5-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Operating Status  
Monitoring Status/Alarm Conditions ___________ (continued)  
! Reading and Qualifying Alarms (continued)  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
*STB?  
Reads the Alarm Condition Register.  
dd  
This query reads the Alarm Condition Register (Figure 5-2).  
Response  
The range is 0 to 255.  
The response value represents the sum of the binary-weighted values of the  
register. The value of unused bits is zero.  
Theory  
The Alarm Condition Register continuously monitors the summary status of  
the instrument.  
The Alarm Condition Register bits are updated in real time—there is no  
latching or buffering.  
Reading/Querying the Alarm Condition Register does not change its contents.  
At powerup, the Alarm Condition Register is cleared.  
5-58  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Operating Status  
Monitoring Status/Alarm Conditions ___________ (continued)  
! Reading and Qualifying Receiver Status ____________________  
Condition  
Register  
Transition  
Filter  
Event  
Register  
0
1
2
0
1
2
*
*
*
"AND"  
&
n
n
*
"OR"  
&
&
&
Summary  
Bit  
Enables condition changes to  
report to Event Register  
:STATus:<register>:PTR . . .  
:STATus:<register>:PTR?  
:STATus:<register>:NTR . . .  
:STATus:<register>:NTR?  
Latches condition changes  
:STATus:<register>:EVENt?  
Continuously monitors  
conditions  
:STATus:<register>:CONDition?  
Event  
Enable  
Register  
0
1
2
=
positive transition or  
negative transition or  
either transition or  
neither transition  
*
n
<register> = OPERation or  
QUEStionable or  
Enables events to  
report to summary bit  
OPERation:HARDware or  
:STATus:<register>:ENABle <bit mask>  
:STATus:<register>:ENABle?  
OPERation:HOLDover or  
OPERation:POWerup  
Figure 5-3. Condition, Transition Filter, Event Enable, and Event  
Registers  
Operating and Programming Guide  
5-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Operating Status  
Monitoring Status/Alarm Conditions ___________ (continued)  
! Reading and Qualifying Receiver Status (continued)  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
:STATus:<register>:CONDition?  
Reads the specified condition register.  
dd  
This query reads the specified condition register (figures 5-3 and 5-1).  
Expanded Syntax  
:STATus:OPERation:CONDition?  
:STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition?  
:STATus:OPERation:HARDware:CONDition?  
:STATus:OPERation:HOLDover:CONDition?  
:STATus:OPERation:POWerup:CONDition?  
Response  
The range is 0 to 65535.  
The response value represents the sum of the binary-weighted values of the  
register. The value of unused bits is zero.  
Note that some bits, those which are “event-only”, have no corresponding  
conditions.  
Theory  
A condition register continuously monitors the hardware and firmware status  
(that is, the operating conditions) of the instrument.  
Conditions register bits are updated in real time—there is no latching or  
buffering.  
Reading/Querying a condition register does not change its contents.  
At powerup, the conditions registers are cleared.  
5-60  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Operating Status  
Monitoring Status/Alarm Conditions ___________ (continued)  
! Reading and Qualifying Receiver Status (continued)  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
:STATus:<register>:EVENt?  
Reads the specified event register.  
dd  
This query reads the specified event register (figures 5-3 and 5-1), retrieving  
information about what has happened to the instrument since it was last  
queried, or cleared by :SYSTem:PRESet or *CLS.  
Expanded Syntax  
:STATus:OPERation:EVENt?  
:STATus:QUEStionable:EVENt?  
:STATus:OPERation:HARDware:EVENt?  
:STATus:OPERation:HOLDover:EVENt?  
:STATus:OPERation:POWerup:EVENt?  
Response  
The range is 0 to 65535.  
The response value represents the sum of the binary-weighted values of the  
register. The value of unused bits is zero.  
Side Effects  
Reading/Querying an event register clears it.  
Theory  
An event register captures changes in conditions. When a transition occurs, the  
corresponding bit in the event register is set TRUE. The instrument can be  
configured (using :STATus:<register>:NTRansition and  
:STATus:<register>:PTRansition), for each bit position, to capture the positive,  
the negative, either, or neither transition.  
Event register bits, once set, are latched. That is, they remain set until they are  
read. When they are read, they are cleared.  
At powerup, the event registers are cleared.  
See Also  
:STATus:<register>:NTRansition . . .  
:STATus:<register>:PTRansition . . .  
Operating and Programming Guide  
5-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Operating Status  
Monitoring Status/Alarm Conditions ___________ (continued)  
! Reading and Qualifying Receiver Status (continued)  
:SYSTem:PRESet  
:STATus:<register>:ENABle . . .  
Sets the specified enable register.  
See Figure 5-1 for Default  
Event Enable identification  
NON-VOLATILE  
The setting of an enable register (figures 5-3 and 5-1) selects which events from  
the corresponding event register are enabled to report to the corresponding  
summary bit of the summarizing condition register.  
Expanded Syntax  
:STATus:OPERation:ENABle <bit mask>  
:STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle <bit mask>  
:STATus:OPERation:HARDware:ENABle <bit mask>  
:STATus:OPERation:HOLDover:ENABle <bit mask>  
:STATus:OPERation:POWerup:ENABle <bit mask>  
Parameter  
The <bit mask> has a range of 0 to 65535.  
The <bit mask> value represents the sum of the binary-weighted values of the  
register. Attempts to set unused bits in an enable register are ignored—the  
value of unused bits is zero.  
5-62  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Operating Status  
Monitoring Status/Alarm Conditions ___________ (continued)  
! Reading and Qualifying Receiver Status (continued)  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
:STATus:<register>:ENABle?  
Reads the specified enable register.  
dd  
Reading an enable register (figures 5-3 and 5-1) identifies which events from  
the corresponding event register are enabled to report to the corresponding  
summary bit of the summarizing condition register.  
Expanded Syntax  
:STATus:OPERation:ENABle?  
:STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle?  
:STATus:OPERation:HARDware:ENABle?  
:STATus:OPERation:HOLDover:ENABle?  
:STATus:OPERation:POWerup:ENABle?  
Response  
The range is 0 to 65535.  
The response value represents the sum of the binary-weighted values of the  
register. The value of unused bits is zero.  
Theory  
Reading/Querying an enable register does not change its contents.  
Operating and Programming Guide  
5-63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Operating Status  
Monitoring Status/Alarm Conditions ___________ (continued)  
! Reading and Qualifying Receiver Status (continued)  
:SYSTem:PRESet  
:STATus:<register>:NTRansition . . .  
:STATus:<register>:PTRansition . . .  
Sets the specified transition filter registers.  
See Figure 5-1 for Default  
Transition Filter  
identification  
NON-VOLATILE  
The setting of the transition filter registers selects which condition transitions  
(positive, negative, either, or neither) are enabled to report events.  
Expanded Syntax  
:STATus:OPERation:NTRansition <bit mask>  
:STATus:QUEStionable:NTRansition <bit mask>  
:STATus:OPERation:HARDware:NTRansition <bit mask>  
:STATus:OPERation:HOLDover:NTRansition <bit mask>  
:STATus:OPERation:POWerup:NTRansition <bit mask>  
:STATus:OPERation:PTRansition <bit mask>  
:STATus:QUEStionable:PTRansition <bit mask>  
:STATus:OPERation:HARDware:PTRansition <bit mask>  
:STATus:OPERation:HOLDover:PTRansition <bit mask>  
:STATus:OPERation:POWerup:PTRansition <bit mask>  
Parameter  
The <bit mask> has a range of 0 to 65535.  
The <bit mask> value represents the sum of the binary-weighted values of the  
register. Attempts to set unused bits in the transition filter are ignored—the  
value of unused bits is zero.  
To enable negative (one to zero) transitions of specific conditions, set the  
corresponding bits to one in the <bit mask> for the NTRansition register  
command.  
To enable positive (zero to one) transitions of specific conditions, set the  
corresponding bits to one in the <bit mask> for the PTRansition register  
command.  
Note that some bits, those which are “event-only”, have no transition filter  
setting. Attempts to set these bits are ignored.  
5-64  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Operating Status  
Monitoring Status/Alarm Conditions ___________ (continued)  
! Reading and Qualifying Receiver Status (continued)  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
:STATus:<register>:NTRansition?  
:STATus:<register>:PTRansition?  
Reads the specified transition filter registers.  
dd  
Reading the transition filter registers identifies which condition transitions  
(positive, negative, either, or neither) are enabled to report events.  
Expanded Syntax  
:STATus:OPERation:NTRansition?  
:STATus:QUEStionable:NTRansition?  
:STATus:OPERation:HARDware:NTRansition?  
:STATus:OPERation:HOLDover:NTRansition?  
:STATus:OPERation:POWerup:NTRansition?  
:STATus:OPERation:PTRansition?  
:STATus:QUEStionable:PTRansition?  
:STATus:OPERation:HARDware:PTRansition?  
:STATus:OPERation:HOLDover:PTRansition?  
:STATus:OPERation:POWerup:PTRansition?  
Response  
The range is 0 to 65535.  
The response value represents the sum of the binary-weighted values of the  
register. The value of unused bits is zero.  
The bits which are set to one in the <bit mask> of the NTRansition query  
response indicate the enabled negative transitions of corresponding conditions.  
The bits which are set to one in the <bit mask> of the PTRansition query  
response indicate the enabled positive transitions of corresponding conditions.  
Theory  
Reading/Querying a transition filter register does not change its contents.  
Operating and Programming Guide  
5-65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Operating Status  
Monitoring Status/Alarm Conditions ___________ (continued)  
! Reading and Qualifying Command Error Status ____________  
Command Error  
Event  
Register  
not used  
not used  
Query Error  
2
3
4
5
"AND"  
Hardware/Firmware Error  
Semantic Error  
Syntactic Error  
not used  
ESR?  
&
*
7
Power Cycled  
&
&
&
&
Command Error  
Enable  
Register  
"OR"  
Command Error  
Summary Bit of  
Alarm Condition  
Register  
not used  
not used  
Query Error  
Hardware/Firmware Error  
Semantic Error  
Syntactic Error  
not used  
2
3
4
5
ESE <bit mask>  
ESE?  
*
*
7
Power Cycled  
Figure 5-4. Command Error Event and Enable Registers  
:SYSTem:PRESet  
*ESE . . .  
Sets the Command Error Enable Register.  
0
NON-VOLATILE  
The setting of the Command Error Enable Register (Figure 5-4) selects which  
events from the Command Error Event Register are enabled to report to the  
Command Error Summary bit of the Alarm Condition Register.  
Expanded Syntax  
*ESE <bit mask>  
Parameter  
The <bit mask> has a range of 0 to 255.  
The <bit mask> value represents the sum of the binary-weighted values of the  
register. Attempts to set unused bits in the register are ignored—the value of  
unused bits is zero.  
5-66  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Operating Status  
Monitoring Status/Alarm Conditions ___________ (continued)  
! Reading and Qualifying Command Error Status (continued)  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
*ESE?  
Reads the Command Error Enable Register.  
dd  
This query identifies the status conditions enabled to generate an alarm.  
Reading the Command Error Enable Register (Figure 5-4) identifies which  
events from the Command Error Event Register are enabled to report to the  
Command Error Summary bit of the Alarm Condition Register.  
Response  
The range is 0 to 255.  
The response value represents the sum of the binary–weighted values of the  
register. The value of unused bits is zero.  
Theory  
Reading/Querying the Command Error Enable Register does not change its  
contents.  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
*ESR?  
Reads the Command Error Event Register.  
dd  
This query reads the Command Error Event Register, retrieving information  
about errors (or power cycles) that have occurred since the instrument was last  
queried, or cleared by SYSTem:PRESet or *CLS.  
Response  
The range is 0 to 255.  
The response value represents the sum of the binary-weighted values of the  
register. The value of unused bits is zero.  
Operating and Programming Guide  
5-67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Operating Status  
Monitoring Status/Alarm Conditions ___________ (continued)  
! Reporting Questionable Status ____________________________  
:SYSTem:PRESet  
:STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition:USER . . .  
Sets the User-reported bit of the Questionable Condition Register.  
Clear  
NON-VOLATILE  
This command sets the User-reported bit of the Questionable Condition  
Register.  
Expanded Syntax  
:STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition:USER SET or CLEar  
Parameter  
SET will cause the User-reported bit of Questionable Condition Register to be  
set to 1.  
CLEar will cause the User-reported bit of Questionable Condition Register to  
be set to 0.  
Side Effects  
The User-reported bit of the Questionable Condition Register is set or cleared  
by this command.  
Theory  
A condition change (from SET to CLEAR, or CLEAR to SET) of the User-  
reported bit of the Questionable Condition Register, and the appropriate  
configuration of the Questionable Transition Filter is necessary to generate an  
event in the Questionable Event Register.  
Furthermore, when the User-reported bit of Questionable Event Enable  
Register is enabled, and the Questionable Summary bit of the Alarm Enable  
Register is enabled, then a transition of the User-reported condition will  
generate an ALARM.  
5-68  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Operating Status  
Monitoring Status/Alarm Conditions ___________ (continued)  
! Reporting Questionable Status (continued)  
:STATus:QUEStionable:EVENt:USER . . .  
Generates a transition of the User-reported bit of the Questionable  
Condition Register.  
EVENT  
NON-VOLATILE  
This command generates a transition of the User-reported bit of the  
Questionable Condition Register.  
Expanded Syntax  
:STATus:QUEStionable:EVENt:USER PTRansition or NTRansition  
Parameter  
PTRansition will cause the User-reported bit of Questionable Condition  
Register to transition from a setting of 0 to a setting of 1.  
NTRansition will cause the User-reported bit of Questionable Condition  
Register to transition from a setting of 1 to a setting of 0.  
Context Dependencies  
Issuing PTRansition, while the User-reported bit of the Questionable Positive  
Transition Register is enabled, sets the User-reported bit of the Questionable  
Event register.  
Issuing NTRansition, while the User-reported bit of the Questionable Negative  
Transition Register is enabled, sets the User-reported bit of the Questionable  
Event register.  
Side Effects  
The user-reported bit of the Questionable Condition Register is set by the  
PTRansition parameter or cleared by the NTRansition parameter.  
Theory  
A positive or negative (PTRansition or NTRansition) of the User-reported bit of  
the Questionable Condition Register, and the appropriate configuration of the  
Questionable Transition Filter is necessary to generate an event in the  
Questionable Event Register.  
Furthermore, when the User-reported bit of Questionable Event Enable  
Register is enabled, and the Questionable Summary bit of the Alarm Enable  
Register is enabled, then a User-reported event will generate an ALARM.  
Operating and Programming Guide  
5-69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Operating Status  
Assessing Receiver Health ________________________________  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
*TST?  
Executes an internal selftest and reports the results.  
dd  
This query causes an internal selftest and the response indicates whether any  
errors were detected. This test takes about 40 seconds to complete.  
Error -330, “Self test failed” is generated if the selftest fails.  
NOTE  
Manual operation of internal diagnostics will affect normal Receiver  
operation, including disruption of any or all of the following: GPS satellite  
tracking, reference oscillator frequency, 1 PPS output timing, and Receiver  
status information. When invoked manually, any of these diagnostics should  
be considered to be destructive tests.  
The following elements and functions are tested:  
CPU  
EPROM  
RAM  
EEPROM  
UART  
QSPI  
FPGA logic  
Interpolators  
GPS engine  
Power supply levels  
Reference oscillator  
Response  
A value of 0 indicates the tests passed, a non-zero value indicates the selftest  
was not completed or was completed with errors detected.  
5-70  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Operating Status  
Assessing Receiver Health ______________________ (continued)  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
:DIAGnostic:LIFetime:COUNt?  
Returns the lifetime count, indicating the total powered-on time.  
dd  
This query returns the lifetime count, indicating the total powered-on time.  
Response  
Range of the integer is 0 to 4,294,967,296 with a resolution of 1. Each count  
represents three hours of operation.  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
:DIAGnostic:TEST? . . .  
Returns information for user-specified test.  
dd  
This query returns information for user-specified test.  
Expanded Syntax  
:DIAGnostic:TEST? ALL or DISPlay or PROCessor or RAM or EEPRom or UART or QSPI  
or FPGA or INTerpolator or GPS or POWer.  
Response  
A value of 0 (zero) indicates test passed.  
Parameter  
ALL returns test information for all of the tests.  
Operating and Programming Guide  
5-71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Operating Status  
Assessing Receiver Health ______________________ (continued)  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
:DIAGnostic:TEST:RESult?  
Returns the result of the last test and the type of test performed.  
dd, XYZ  
This query returns the result of the last test and the type of test performed.  
Use this query, for example, following powerup to check the outcome of the  
powerup selftest.  
Response  
A value of 0 indicates test passed. Non-zero value indicates test failed.  
The literal or alphanumeric characters portion of the response identifies the  
specific test.  
5-72  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
System Time  
System Time  
The GPS Receiver is designed to allow you access to a very accurate system  
clock that provides both date and time, to customize the clock for a local time  
zone, to identify the exact time, to identify the accumulated time difference (in  
seconds) between the GPS and UTC timelines, and to monitor and adjust for  
leap second occurrences.  
The following commands are provided to allow you to monitor and control the  
system date and time.  
" Identifying Time of Next 1 PPS Reference Edge  
:PTIMe:TCODe?  
" Reading Current Time  
:PTIMe:DATE?  
:PTIMe:TIME?  
or  
or  
:SYSTem:DATE?  
:SYSTem:TIME?  
:PTIMe:TIME:STRing?  
" Applying Local Time Zone Offset  
:PTIMe:TZONe ...  
:PTIMe:TZONe?  
" Defining the 1 PPS Reference Edge (59551A Only)  
:PTIMe:PPS:EDGE ...  
:PTIMe:PPS:EDGE?  
" Reading Leap Second Status  
:PTIMe:LEAPsecond:ACCumulated?  
:PTIMe:LEAPsecond:DATE?  
:PTIMe:LEAPsecond:DURation?  
:PTIMe:LEAPsecond:STATe?  
Operating and Programming Guide  
5-73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
System Time  
Identifying Time of Next 1 PPS Reference Edge __________  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
:PTIMe:TCODe?  
ASCII Data  
Returns timecode message 980 to 20 ms prior to 1 PPS of  
indicated time.  
This query returns timecode message 980 to 20 ms prior to 1 PPS of indicated  
time. This special query provides not only accurate time but also provides the  
user the opportunity to correctly correlate this time with a corresponding  
1 PPS edge.  
Response  
The query response provides the following type of information:  
date and time of next on-time edge,  
Time Figure of Merit,  
Frequency Figure of Merit,  
leap second indicator,  
alarm indication, and  
service request.  
An example response is:  
T2199505112055233000049  
This example is in the "T2YYYYMMDDHHMMSSMFLRVcc" format, where  
T2  
indicates a timecode message.  
YYYYMMDD is the calendar date at the next 1 PPS on-time edge.  
HHMMSS  
is the 24 hour time at the next 1 PPS on-time edge.  
Note that this value is influenced by the ptim:tzon setting.  
M
F
is time figure of merit.  
is frequency figure of merit.  
L
is leapsecond indicator (- means a -1 leapsecond is pending,  
0 means no leapsecond pending, + means a 1 leapsecond is  
pending).  
R
is the request for service bit from the status system (0 = no  
service requested, 1 = service requested). An alarm will be  
generated when this byte transitions to 1.  
V
is validity byte. 1 indicates that time-related information isn't  
valid, 0 indicates that it is valid.  
cc  
is the checksum of the prior bytes (two Hex bytes).  
5-74  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
System Time  
Reading Current Time____________________________________  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
:PTIMe:DATE?  
:SYSTem:DATE?  
Returns the current calendar date.  
dd, dd, dd  
This query returns the current calendar date. The local calendar date is always  
referenced to UTC time, offset by any local time zone value that has been  
provided by the user. The year, month, and day are returned.  
Response  
Three fields are separated by commas: <year>,<month>,<day>.  
The <year> range is 1994 to 2077.  
The <month> range is 1 to 12.  
The <day> range is 1 to 31.  
Context Dependencies  
This query is not valid prior to the first lock following powerup (see bit 2 of the  
Powerup Status Register) or :SYSTem:PRESet. Sending this query before the  
first lock will generate error -230.  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
:PTIMe:TIME?  
:SYSTem:TIME?  
Returns the current 24-hour time.  
dd, dd, dd  
This query returns the current 24-hour time. The local time is always  
referenced to UTC time, offset by any local time zone value that has been  
provided by the user. The hour, minute, and second is returned.  
Response  
Three fields are separated by commas: <hour>,<minute>,<second>.  
The <hour> range is 0 to 23.  
The <minute> range is 0 to 59.  
The <second> range is 0 to 60. The value of 60 only occurs as the UTC  
leapsecond.  
Context Dependencies  
This query is not valid prior to the first lock following powerup (see bit 2 of the  
Powerup Status Register) or :SYSTem:PRESet. Sending this query before the  
first lock will generate error -230.  
Operating and Programming Guide  
5-75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
System Time  
Reading Current Time__________________________ (continued)  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
:PTIMe:TIME:STRing?  
Returns the current 24-hour time suitable for display.  
“XYZ”  
This query returns the current 24-hour time suitable for display (for example,  
15:23:06).  
Context Dependencies  
This query is not valid prior to the first lock following powerup (see bit 2 of the  
Powerup Status Register) or :SYSTem:PRESet. Sending this query before the  
first lock will generate error -230.  
5-76  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
System Time  
Applying Local Time Zone Offset _________________________  
:SYSTem:PRESet  
:PTIMe:TZONe . . .  
Sets the time zone local time offset to provide an offset from UTC  
to serve as the basis for all reported time.  
0,0  
NON-VOLATILE  
This command sets the time zone local time offset to provide an offset from  
Universal Coordinated Time (UTC) to serve as the basis for all reported time.  
The local 24-hour time and local calendar date depend on the present setting  
of the time zone parameter, which is used to indicate the offset from UTC.  
Typical application of this command is to account for time zone differences  
between the installed Receiver location and the prime meridian at Greenwich,  
which uses UTC uncorrected.  
Expanded Syntax  
:PTIMe:TZONe <hour>, <minutes>  
Parameter  
The <hour> range is -12 to +12, and is rounded to the nearest integer.  
The optionally supplied <minute> range -59 to +59, and is rounded to the  
nearest integer. The <minute> is defaulted to 0 if not supplied.  
Context Dependencies  
:SYSTem:PRESet sets the time zone to zero (0,0).  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
:PTIMe:TZONe?  
Returns the local time zone offset.  
dd, dd  
This query returns the local time zone offset.  
Response  
The first returned value is offset hours. The second returned value is offset  
minutes.  
Operating and Programming Guide  
5-77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
System Time  
Defining the 1 PPS Reference Edge (59551A Only) ____  
59551A  
:SYSTem:PRESet  
:PTIMe:PPS:EDGE . . .  
Selects the polarity of the 1 PPS on-time edge.  
RISing  
NON-VOLATILE  
This command selects the polarity of the 1 PPS on-time edge.  
Expanded Syntax  
:PTIMe:PPS:EDGE RISing or FALLing  
Parameter  
The RISing parameter sets the 1 PPS rising edge as the on-time edge.  
The FALLing parameter sets the 1 PPS falling edge as the on-time edge.  
59551A  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
:PTIMe:PPS:EDGE?  
Returns the polarity of the 1 PPS on-time edge.  
XYZ  
This query returns the polarity of the 1 PPS on-time edge.  
Response  
RIS indicates that the 1 PPS on-time edge is the rising edge.  
FALL indicates that the 1 PPS on-time edge is the falling edge.  
5-78  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
System Time  
Reading Leap Second Status ______________________________  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
:PTIMe:LEAPsecond:ACCumulated?  
Returns the leap second difference accumulated between GPS  
time and UTC time since the beginning of GPS time. The time  
units are seconds.  
dd  
This query returns the leap second difference accumulated between GPS time  
and UTC time since the beginning of GPS time. The time units are seconds.  
Response  
An example response is:  
+10  
which indicates that the accumulated leap second difference between the GPS  
time and UTC is 10 seconds.  
Context Dependencies  
This query is not valid prior to the first lock following powerup (see bit 2 of the  
Powerup Status Register) or :SYSTem:PRESet. Sending this query before the  
first lock will generate error -230.  
Theory  
The leap second value is initialized during the power-on sequence by  
evaluating :PTIMe:LEAPsecond:ACC = GPS time - UTC time. In July 1994,  
the value was 10 seconds.  
The value is automatically adjusted immediately following the occurrence of a  
leap second correction to the UTC time scale. When a 1 leap second addition is  
made to the UTC time scale, the extra second delays the arrival of midnight  
UTC causing :PTIM:LEAP:ACC? to increase by 1 second. When a 1 leap second  
subtraction is made to the UTC time scale, the missing second hastens the  
arrival of UTC midnight causing :PTIM:LEAP:ACC? to decrease by 1 second.  
Operating and Programming Guide  
5-79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
System Time  
Reading Leap Second Status ____________________ (continued)  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
:PTIMe:LEAPsecond:DATE?  
Returns the UTC calendar date of next leap second.  
dd, dd, dd  
This query returns the UTC calendar date of next leap second. The year,  
month, and day are returned.  
Response  
Three fields are separated by commas: <year>,<month>,<day>.  
The <year> range is 1994 to 2077.  
The <month> range is 1 to 12.  
The <day> range is 1 to 31.  
Context Dependencies  
This query is not valid prior to the first lock following powerup (see bit 2 of the  
Powerup Status Register) or :SYSTem:PRESet, or if no leap second is pending.  
Sending this query before the first lock or if no leap second is pending will  
generate error -230.  
5-80  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
System Time  
Reading Leap Second Status ____________________ (continued)  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
:PTIMe:LEAPsecond:DURation?  
Returns the duration of the minute corrected by the next leap  
second.  
dd  
This query identifies whether a leap second is pending, distinguishes between  
leap seconds which extend the minute, and leap seconds which shorten the  
minute. This query returns the duration of the minute corrected by the next  
leap second. The duration units are seconds.  
Response  
Returns a value of 59, 60 or 61:  
A value of 59 indicates subtraction of 1 second is pending.  
A value of 60 indicates no leap second pending.  
A value of 61 indicates addition of 1 second is pending.  
Context Dependencies  
This query is not valid prior to the first lock following powerup (see bit 2 of the  
Powerup Status Register) or :SYSTem:PRESet, or if no leap second is pending.  
Sending this query before the first lock or if no leap second is pending will  
generate error -230.  
Operating and Programming Guide  
5-81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
System Time  
Reading Leap Second Status ____________________ (continued)  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
:PTIMe:LEAPsecond:STATe?  
Identifies if leap second is pending.  
0 or 1  
This query identifies if a leap second is pending. This query looks ahead to  
indicate a pending leap second.  
Response  
A value of 0 indicates no leap second is pending.  
A value of 1 indicates a leap second is pending. The leap second adjustment can  
be either the addition of a second or the subtraction of a second.  
Context Dependencies  
This query is not valid prior to the first lock following powerup (see bit 2 of the  
Powerup Status Register) or :SYSTem:PRESet (but is valid if no leap second is  
pending). Sending this query before the first lock will generate error -230.  
5-82  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Programmable Pulse Output (59551A Only)  
Programmable Pulse Output  
(59551A Only)  
The Programmable Pulse output feature provides a means of using the GPS  
Receiver as a pulse generator. The pulse output, which is programmable by the  
user, can either generate a stream of pulses at a specified start time and  
repetition interval, or it can produce a single pulse at a specified time and then  
stop.  
The following commands are provided to allow you to operate and control the  
programmable output of the 59551A GPS Receiver.  
Note that the configuring of the Programmable Pulse output requires  
consideration of five settings: start date, start time, continuous on/off, pulse  
period, and pulse polarity. Changing any one of the settings will stop any  
previously configured pulse stream and reassert all five settings. If the start  
date has already passed when you modify the repetition interval, the pulse  
output will halt until you provide a new start date.  
:PULSe:CONTinuous:PERiod ...  
:PULSe:CONTinuous:PERiod?  
:PULSe:CONTinuous:STATe ...  
:PULSe:CONTinuous:STATe?  
:PULSe:REFerence:EDGE ...  
:PULSe:REFerence:EDGE?  
:PULSe:STARt:DATE ...  
:PULSe:STARt:DATE?  
:PULSe:STARt:TIME ...  
:PULSe:STARt:TIME?  
Operating and Programming Guide  
5-83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Programmable Pulse Output (59551A Only)  
59551A  
:SYSTem:PRESet  
:PULSe:CONTinuous:PERiod . . .  
Sets the interval between pulses in seconds.  
1
NON-VOLATILE  
This command sets the interval between pulses in seconds.  
Expanded Syntax  
:PULSe:CONTinuous:PERiod <seconds>  
Parameter  
The <seconds> parameter range is 1 to 31536000, equivalent to one year.  
Resolution is 1.  
Context Dependencies  
The interval set by this command is only used if :PULSe:CONTinuous:STATe  
is ON.  
59551A  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
:PULSe:CONTinuous:PERiod?  
Returns the interval between pulses in seconds.  
dd  
This query returns the interval between pulses in seconds.  
5-84  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Programmable Pulse Output (59551A Only)  
59551A  
:SYSTem:PRESet  
:PULSe:CONTinuous:STATe . . .  
Controls whether the Programmable Pulse output will be just one  
pulse or a sequence of pulses.  
OFF  
NON-VOLATILE  
This command controls whether the Programmable Pulse output will be just  
one pulse or a sequence of pulses.  
Expanded Syntax  
:PULSe:CONTinuous:STATe ON or OFF  
Parameter  
OFF selects one pulse. ON selects a sequence of pulses.  
Context Dependencies  
With either state (OFF or ON) the output commences at the time and date  
defined by :PULSe:STARt:DATE and :PULSe:STARt:TIME commands.  
59551A  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
:PULSe:CONTinuous:STATe?  
Identifies whether the Programmable Pulse output is set to output  
a single pulse or a sequence of pulses.  
0 or 1  
This query identifies whether the Programmable Pulse output is set to output  
a single pulse or a sequence of pulses.  
Response  
A value of 0 indicates the Receiver is set to output one pulse.  
A value of 1 indicates the Receiver is set to output a sequence of pulses.  
Operating and Programming Guide  
5-85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Programmable Pulse Output (59551A Only)  
59551A  
:SYSTem:PRESet  
:PULSe:REFerence:EDGE . . .  
Selects the polarity of the Programmable Pulse on-time edge.  
RISing  
NON-VOLATILE  
This command selects the polarity of the Programmable Pulse on-time edge.  
Expanded Syntax  
:PULSe:REFerence:EDGE RISing or FALLing  
Parameter  
The RISing parameter sets the Programmable Pulse rising edge as the on-time  
edge.  
The FALLing parameter sets the Programmable Pulse falling edge as the  
on-time edge.  
59551A  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
:PULSe:REFerence:EDGE?  
Returns the polarity of the Programmable Pulse on-time edge.  
XYZ  
This query returns the polarity of the Programmable Pulse on-time edge.  
Response  
RIS indicates that the Programmable Pulse on-time edge is the rising edge.  
FALL indicates that the Programmable Pulse on-time edge is the falling edge.  
5-86  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Programmable Pulse Output (59551A Only)  
59551A  
:SYSTem:PRESet  
:PULSe:STARt:DATE . . .  
Identifies the date when the individual pulse (or first pulse of the  
pulse sequence) is generated at the Programmable Pulse output.  
1994, 1, 1  
NON-VOLATILE  
This command identifies the date when the individual pulse (or first pulse of  
the pulse sequence) is generated at the Programmable Pulse output.  
Expanded Syntax  
:PULSe:STARt:DATE <four-digit year>,<month>,<day>  
Parameter  
The <four-digit year> range is 1994 to 3000.  
The <month> range is 1 to 12.  
The <day> range is 1 to 31.  
Context Dependencies  
If you select a date and time which occurs prior to the current time or prior to  
the completion of powerup and first GPS lock, the Receiver will not successfully  
find a start—and therefore will produce no pulses.  
If the Receiver has been set up to use a time zone offset to produce local date  
and time, the parameters provided should also be expressed as local date and  
time.  
59551A  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
:PULSe:STARt:DATE?  
Returns the date when the individual pulse (or first pulse of the  
pulse sequence) is generated at the Programmable Pulse output.  
dd, dd, dd  
This query returns the date when the individual pulse (or first pulse of the  
pulse sequence) is generated at the Programmable Pulse output. This query  
returns year, month, and day.  
Response  
Three fields are separated by commas: <four-digit year>,<month>,<day>.  
The <four-digit year> range is 1994 to 3000.  
The <month> range is 1 to 12.  
The <day> range is 1 to 31.  
Operating and Programming Guide  
5-87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Programmable Pulse Output (59551A Only)  
59551A  
:SYSTem:PRESet  
:PULSe:STARt:TIME . . .  
Identifies the time when the individual pulse (or first pulse of the  
pulse sequence) is generated at the Programmable Pulse output.  
0,0,0  
NON-VOLATILE  
This command identifies the time when the individual pulse (or first pulse of  
the pulse sequence) is generated at the Programmable Pulse output.  
Expanded Syntax  
:PULSe:STARt:TIME <hour>,<minute>,<second>  
Parameter  
Three fields are separated by commas: <hour>,<minute>, <second>.  
The <hour> range is 0 to 23.  
The <minute> range is 0 to 59.  
The <second> range is 0 to 59.  
Context Dependencies  
If you select a date and time which occurs prior to the current time or prior to  
the completion of powerup and first GPS lock, the Receiver will not successfully  
find a start—and therefore will produce no pulses.  
If the Receiver has been set up to use a time zone offset to produce local date  
and time, the parameters provided should also be expressed as local date and  
time.  
59551A  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
:PULSe:STARt:TIME?  
Returns the time when the individual pulse (or first pulse of the  
pulse sequence) is generated at the Programmable Pulse output.  
dd, dd, dd  
This query returns the time when the individual pulse (or first pulse of the  
pulse sequence) is generated at the Programmable Pulse output.  
Response  
Three fields are separated by commas: <hour>, <minute>, <second>.  
The <hour> range is 0 to 23.  
The <minute> range is 0 to 59.  
The <second> range is 0 to 59.  
5-88  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Event Time Stamping (59551A Only)  
Event Time Stamping (59551A Only)  
The time stamping feature allows you to use the Receiver with equipment such  
as a fault analyzer or a surge detector that produces a TTL edge when some  
important event happens in the base station. The Receiver has three time  
tagging inputs (Time Tag 1, Time Tag 2, Time Tag 3) which record the time  
of occurrence of TTL edge(s).  
The following commands are provided to allow you to tag and record events  
such as power surges and power outages.  
" Defining the Time-stamped Edge  
:SENSe:TSTamp<channel>:EDGE ...  
:SENSe:TSTamp<channel>:EDGE?  
" Clearing Time Stamp Memory  
:SENSe:DATA:CLEar  
:SENSe:DATA:CLEar ...  
" Reading Time Stamps  
:SENSe:DATA? ...  
:FORMat:DATA ...  
:FORMat:DATA?  
:SENSe:DATA:POINts?  
:SENSe:DATA:POINts? ...  
:SENSe:DATA:TSTamp? ...  
" Processing Memory Overflow  
:SENSe:DATA:MEMory:OVERflow:COUNt?  
:SENSe:DATA:MEMory:OVERflow:COUNt? ...  
:SENSe:DATA:MEMory:SAVE ...  
:SENSe:DATA:MEMory:SAVE?  
Operating and Programming Guide  
5-89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Event Time Stamping (59551A Only)  
Defining the Time-stamped Edge _________________________  
59551A  
:SYSTem:PRESet  
:SENSe:TSTamp<channel>:EDGE . . .  
Selects the polarity of the edges the Receiver will time stamp.  
RISing  
NON-VOLATILE  
This command selects the polarity of the edges the Receiver will time stamp.  
Expanded Syntax  
:SENSe:TSTamp1:EDGE RISing or FALLing  
:SENSe:TSTamp2:EDGE RISing or FALLing  
:SENSe:TSTamp3:EDGE RISing or FALLing  
Parameter  
The RISing parameter sets the time-stamped edge as the rising edge.  
The FALLing parameter sets the time-stamped edge as the falling edge.  
59551A  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
:SENSe:TSTamp<channel>:EDGE?  
Returns the polarity of the edges the Receiver will time stamp.  
XYZ  
This query returns the polarity of the edges the Receiver will time stamp.  
Response  
RIS indicates that the time-stamped edge is the rising edge.  
FALL indicates that the time-stamped edge is the falling edge.  
59551A  
c
:SENSe:DATA:CLEar  
a
b
Clears the data in the measurement buffer for all Time Tag inputs.  
EVENT  
This command clears the data in the measurement buffer and clears the  
overflow counts for all Time Tag inputs.  
Context Dependencies  
:SYSTem:PRESet clears the time stamp measurement buffers and overflow  
counts.  
5-90  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Event Time Stamping (59551A Only)  
Clearing Time Stamp Memory ____________________________  
59551A  
:SENSe:DATA:CLEar . . .  
Clears the data in the time stamp measurement buffer for the user-  
specified Time Tag input.  
EVENT  
This command clears the data in the time stamp measurement buffer for the  
user-specified Time Tag input. Use "TSTamp 1" or "TSTamp 2" or "TSTamp 3"  
to select one input.  
Expanded Syntax  
:SENSe:DATA:CLEar "TSTamp 1" or "TSTamp 2" or "TSTamp 3"  
Parameter  
"TSTamp 1" clears the data in Time Tag 1 input buffer.  
"TSTamp 2" clears the data in Time Tag 2 input buffer.  
"TSTamp 3" clears the data in Time Tag 3 input buffer.  
Context Dependencies  
:SYSTem:PRESet clears the time stamp measurement buffers.  
Operating and Programming Guide  
5-91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Event Time Stamping (59551A Only)  
Reading Time Stamps ____________________________________  
59551A  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
:SENSe:DATA? . . .  
FORMAT = ASCii  
Outputs data from the one specified time stamp measurement  
buffer.  
dd, ...  
FORMAT = INTeger  
BINARY Data  
This query outputs data from the one specified time stamp measurement buffer  
(or Time Tag input). This query does not clear the buffer. Each time stamp  
provides the year, month, day, hours, minutes, seconds, milliseconds,  
microseconds, nanoseconds, and TFOM (Time Figure of Merit).  
Expanded Syntax  
:SENSe:DATA? "TSTamp 1" or "TSTamp 2" or "TSTamp 3"  
Response  
If the format is ASCii (the default format), the response is a sequence of  
comma-separated integers.  
If the format is INTeger, the response is BINARY Data (see Table B-3, in  
Appendix B, “Command Syntax and Style,” in this guide for details).  
To determine which format is selected, use query :FORmat:DATA?.  
Parameter  
Use "TSTamp 1" or "TSTamp 2" or "TSTamp 3" to select one input at a time:  
"TSTamp 1" outputs the data from Time Tag 1 input buffer.  
"TSTamp 2" outputs the data from Time Tag 2 input buffer.  
"TSTamp 3" outputs the data from Time Tag 3 input buffer.  
Context Dependencies  
:SYSTem:PRESet clears the time stamp measurement buffers and overflow  
counts.  
Time stamps are not collected until after the Receiver has completed its  
powerup, and has reached initial lock to GPS.  
Time stamps are not collected while the user is reading/clearing or otherwise  
accessing the time stamp buffers.  
5-92  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Event Time Stamping (59551A Only)  
Reading Time Stamps __________________________ (continued)  
59551A  
:SYSTem:PRESet  
:FORMat:DATA . . .  
Selects output format for the time stamps.  
ASCii  
NON-VOLATILE  
This command selects the output format for the time stamps.  
Expanded Syntax  
:FORMat:DATA ASCii or INTeger  
Parameter  
If the format is ASCii (the default format), the response is a sequence of  
comma-separated integers.  
If the format is INTeger, the response to the :SENSe:DATA? query is BINARY  
Data (see Table B-3, in Appendix B, “Command Syntax and Style,” in this  
guide for details).  
When ASCii formatting is selected the output stream data is buffered. In  
general, INT mode will provide faster output than ASC, but will require special  
data-handling routines to interpret the BINARY Data.  
59551A  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
:FORMat:DATA?  
Returns the output format for time stamp data.  
XYZ  
This query returns the output format for time stamp data.  
Response  
ASC or INT is returned.  
Operating and Programming Guide  
5-93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Event Time Stamping (59551A Only)  
Reading Time Stamps __________________________ (continued)  
59551A  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
:SENSe:DATA:POINts?  
Returns the number of time stamps in each of the three Time Tag  
inputs.  
dd, ...  
This query returns the number of time stamps in each of the three Time Tag  
inputs.  
Response  
Returns three comma-separated integers corresponding to the number of time  
stamps recorded for inputs 1, 2, and 3.  
The numeric range for each integer is 0 to 256.  
Context Dependencies  
:SYSTem:PRESet clears the time stamp measurement buffers and overflow  
counts.  
Time stamps are not collected until after the Receiver has completed its  
powerup and has reached initial GPS lock.  
59551A  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
:SENSe:DATA:POINts? . . .  
Returns the number of time stamps recorded for the one specified  
Time Tag input.  
dd  
This query returns the number of time stamps recorded for the one specified  
Time Tag input. Use "TSTamp 1", "TSTamp 2", or "TSTamp 3" to select one  
input.  
Expanded Syntax  
:SENSe:DATA:POINts? "TSTamp 1" or "TSTamp 2" or "TSTamp 3"  
Response  
Returns an integer corresponding to the number of time stamps recorded for  
the specified input.  
Numeric range is 0 to 256.  
5-94  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Event Time Stamping (59551A Only)  
Reading Time Stamps __________________________ (continued)  
Parameter  
"TSTamp 1"queries for the number of points in Time Tag 1 input buffer.  
"TSTamp 2" queries for the number of points in Time Tag 2 input buffer.  
"TSTamp 3" queries for the number of points in Time Tag 3 input buffer.  
Context Dependencies  
:SYSTem:PRESet clears the time stamp measurement buffers and overflow  
counts.  
Time stamps are not collected until after the Receiver has completed its  
powerup and has reached initial GPS lock.  
59551A  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
:SENSe:DATA:TSTamp? . . .  
Returns a single time stamp.  
dd, ...  
This query returns a single time stamp. Use "TSTamp 1" or "TSTamp 2" or  
"TSTamp 3" to select an input channel. Use <time stamp entry> to select a  
single time stamp recorded on that input.  
Expanded Syntax  
:SENSe:DATA:TSTamp? "TSTamp 1" or "TSTamp 2" or "TSTamp 3",  
<time stamp entry>  
Response  
The query response represents the single time stamp requested.  
The query response is a sequence of ten comma-separated integers constituting  
a single time stamp. The time stamp provides the year, month, day, hours,  
minutes, seconds, milliseconds, microseconds, nanoseconds, and TFOM (Time  
Figure of Merit).  
For example,  
:SENSe:DATA:TSTamp? "TSTamp 2", 37  
Selects the 37th time stamp recorded on Time Tag Input 2.  
Operating and Programming Guide  
5-95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Event Time Stamping (59551A Only)  
Reading Time Stamps __________________________ (continued)  
Parameter  
<time tag input> parameter:  
"TSTamp 1" to select Time Tag 1 input buffer.  
"TSTamp 2" to select Time Tag 2 input buffer.  
"TSTamp 3" to select Time Tag 3 input buffer.  
<time stamp entry> parameter range is 1 to 256.  
Context Dependencies  
:SYSTem:PRESet clears the time stamp measurement buffers and overflow  
counts.  
Time stamps are not collected until after the Receiver has completed its  
powerup and has reached initial GPS lock.  
5-96  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Event Time Stamping (59551A Only)  
Processing Memory Overflows ____________________________  
59551A  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
:SENSe:DATA:MEMory:OVERflow:COUNt?  
Returns an overflow count for each of the three Time Tag inputs.  
d.dEe, ...  
This query returns an overflow count for each of the three Time Tag inputs.  
An “overflow count” occurs after 256 time stamps have been recorded. When  
any additional events are detected at the input, the overflow count increments.  
If memory management protocol has been set to “FIRST,” the first 256 time  
stamps are recorded. The overflow count indicates the number of time stamps  
which followed the last recorded stamp, and which were discarded.  
If memory management protocol has been set to “LAST,” the most recent  
256 time stamps are recorded. The overflow count indicates the number of  
stamps which were collected prior to the first recorded stamp, and which were  
overwritten.  
Response  
Returns three comma-separated floating-point numbers corresponding to the  
overflow count of each of the three inputs: 1, 2, 3.  
Context Dependencies  
:SYSTem:PRESet clears the time stamp measurement buffers and overflow  
counts.  
Time stamps are not collected until after the Receiver has completed its  
powerup and has reached initial GPS lock.  
Operating and Programming Guide  
5-97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Event Time Stamping (59551A Only)  
Processing Memory Overflows __________________ (continued)  
59551A  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
:SENSe:DATA:MEMory:OVERflow:COUNt? . . .  
Returns an overflow count for the selected Time Tag input.  
d.dEe  
This query returns an overflow count for the selected Time Tag input.  
Use "TSTamp 1", "TSTamp 2", or "TSTamp 3" to select or query one input at a  
time.  
Expanded Syntax  
:SENSe:DATA:MEMory:OVERflow:COUNt? "TSTamp 1" or "TSTamp 2" or "TSTamp 3"  
Response  
Returns one floating-point number corresponding to the overflow count of the  
selected Time Tag input.  
Context Dependencies  
:SYSTem:PRESet clears the time stamp measurement buffers and overflow  
counts.  
Time stamps are not collected until after the Receiver has completed its  
powerup and has reached initial GPS lock.  
59551A  
:SYSTem:PRESet  
:SENSe:DATA:MEMory:SAVE . . .  
Sets the Receiver’s memory management protocol.  
FIRSt  
NON-VOLATILE  
This command sets the Receiver’s memory management protocol.  
Expanded Syntax  
:SENSe:DATA:MEMory:SAVE FIRSt or LAST  
Parameter  
FIRSt retains time stamps for the first 256 events detected.  
LAST retains time stamps of the last (most recent) 256 events detected.  
Context Dependencies  
:SYSTem:PRESet sets memory management protocol to retain time stamps for  
FIRSt 256 events.  
5-98  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Event Time Stamping (59551A Only)  
Processing Memory Overflows __________________ (continued)  
59551A  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
:SENSe:DATA:MEMory:SAVE?  
Returns the state of the memory management protocol.  
XYZ  
This query returns the state of the memory management protocol.  
Response  
FIRSt indicates that the memory retains time stamps for the first 256 events  
detected.  
LAST indicates that the memory retains time stamps for the last (most recent)  
256 events detected.  
Operating and Programming Guide  
5-99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Serial Interface Communication  
Serial Interface Communication  
The 59551A and 58503B GPS Receivers provide a set of commands that allow  
you to configure the serial interface port(s) for instrument communications. A  
set of special commands is provided for the 59551A Receiver since it has two  
different serial ports (PORT 1, PORT 2).  
Both Receivers have the rear-panel RS-232C serial interface port (PORT 1).  
The 59551A has an additional front-panel RS-232C serial interface port  
(PORT 2).  
The following commands are provided to allow you to configure the ports.  
! Configuring I/O Port 1 <port> = SERial1 or SERial  
Configuring I/O Port 2 <port> = SERial2 (59551A Only)  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate?  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:<port>:BAUD ...  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:<port>:BAUD?  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial1:BITS ...  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:<port>:BITS?  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:<port>:FDUPlex ...  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:<port>:FDUPlex?  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:<port>:PACE ...  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:<port>:PACE?  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:<port>:PARity ...  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:<port>:PARity?  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial1:SBITs ...  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:<port>:SBITs?  
(59551A)  
(59551A)  
! Recovering the Last Query Response  
:DIAGnostic:QUERy:RESPonse?  
5-100  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Serial Interface Communication  
Configuring I/O Ports _____________________________________  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate?  
Identifies which serial port is being used.  
XYZ  
This query identifies which serial port is being used. Use this query when the  
Receiver is installed out of sight or at a remote location. The distinction  
between SERIAL1 and SERIAL2 is required in communication commands for  
setting parameters such as baud and parity.  
Response  
SER1 or SER2 is returned.  
:SYSTem:PRESet  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:<port>:BAUD . . .  
=
R, F  
Sets the baud rate of specified port.  
Not affected  
NON-VOLATILE  
This command sets the baud rate of the specified port.  
Expanded Syntax  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial1:BAUD 1200 or 2400 or 9600 or 19200  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial2:BAUD 1200 or 2400 or 9600 or 19200  
Parameter  
The possible baud rate values that can be entered are 1200, 2400, 9600, or  
19200.  
Context Dependencies  
The baud rate value is stored in non-volatile memory. It is unaffected by  
powerup and :SYSTem:PRESet.  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:<port>:PRESet sets the baud rate to 9600, which is  
the factory-default value.  
=
Must be received via the specified I/O port.  
Operating and Programming Guide  
5-101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Serial Interface Communication  
Configuring I/O Ports ___________________________ (continued)  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
R, F  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:<port>:BAUD?  
Returns the baud rate of specified port.  
dd  
This query returns the baud rate of specified port.  
Expanded Syntax  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial1:BAUD?  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial2:BAUD?  
59551A  
:SYSTem:PRESet  
R
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial1:BITS . . .  
Sets the data bits value of PORT 1.  
Not affected  
NON-VOLATILE  
This command sets the data bits of PORT 1.  
Expanded Syntax  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial1:BITS 7 or 8  
Parameter  
The possible data bits values that can be entered are 7 or 8.  
Context Dependencies  
The data bits value is stored in non-volatile memory. It is unaffected by  
powerup and :SYSTem:PRESet.  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial1:PRESet sets the data bits to 8, which is the  
factory-default value.  
5-102  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Serial Interface Communication  
Configuring I/O Ports ___________________________ (continued)  
RESPONSEFORMAT  
R, F  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:<port>:BITS?  
Returns the data bits value of specified port.  
dd  
This query returns the data bits value of the specified port.  
Expanded Syntax  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial1:BITS?  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial2:BITS?  
:SYSTem:PRESet  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:<port>:FDUPlex . . .  
=
R, F  
Sets the duplex state of specified port.  
Not affected  
NON-VOLATILE  
This command sets the duplex state of the specified port. Use this command  
when you cannot see on the computer screen the characters you are typing for  
your command.  
Expanded Syntax  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial1:FDUPlex ON or OFF  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial2:FDUPlex ON or OFF  
Parameter  
ON enables echoing of the characters you type (i.e., when typing a command,  
the ON state allows you to see on the computer screen the characters you type).  
OFF disables the echoing of the characters you type.  
Context Dependencies  
The duplex state is stored in non-volatile memory. It is unaffected by powerup  
and :SYSTem:PRESet.  
SYSTem:COMMunicate:<port>:PRESet sets the duplex state to ON, which is  
the factory-default state.  
=
Must be received via the specified I/O port.  
Operating and Programming Guide  
5-103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Serial Interface Communication  
Configuring I/O Ports ___________________________ (continued)  
RESPONSEFORMAT  
R, F  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:<port>:FDUPlex?  
Returns the duplex state of the specified port.  
0 or 1  
This query returns the duplex state of the specified port.  
Expanded Syntax  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial1:FDUPlex?  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial2:FDUPlex?  
Response  
A value of 0 indicates echo is OFF.  
A value of 1 indicates echo is ON.  
:SYSTem:PRESet  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:<port>:PACE . . .  
=
R, F  
Sets flow control of the specified port.  
Not affected  
NON-VOLATILE  
This command sets flow control of the specified port.  
Expanded Syntax  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial1:PACE XON or NONE  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial2:PACE XON or NONE  
Parameter  
The choices are XON or NONE.  
Context Dependencies  
The software pacing or flow control state is stored in non-volatile memory. It is  
unaffected by powerup and :SYSTem:PRESet.  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:<port>:PRESet sets the flow control to NONE, which  
is the factory-default state.  
=
Must be received via the specified I/O port.  
5-104  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Serial Interface Communication  
Configuring I/O Ports ___________________________ (continued)  
RESPONSEFORMAT  
R, F  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:<port>:PACE?  
Returns flow control state of the specified port.  
XYZ  
This query returns the flow control state of specified port.  
Expanded Syntax  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial1:PACE?  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial2:PACE?  
Response  
XON or NONE is returned.  
:SYSTem:PRESet  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:<port>:PARity . . .  
=
R, F  
Sets parity of the specified port.  
Not affected  
NON-VOLATILE  
This command sets parity of the specified port.  
Expanded Syntax  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial1:PARity: EVEN or ODD or NONE  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial2:PARity: EVEN or ODD or NONE or ONE  
Parameter  
The choices for SERial1 are EVEN, ODD, or NONE.  
The choices for SERial2 are EVEN, ODD, NONE, or ONE.  
Context Dependencies  
The parity state is stored in non-volatile memory. It is unaffected by powerup  
and :SYSTem:PRESet.  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:<port>:PRESet sets the parity to NONE, which is the  
factory-default state.  
If parity is enabled, the Receiver sends/receives 7 data bits plus 1 parity bit.  
If parity is disabled, the Receiver sends/receives 8 data bits.  
=
Must be received via the specified I/O port.  
Operating and Programming Guide  
5-105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Serial Interface Communication  
Configuring I/O Ports ___________________________ (continued)  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
R, F  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:<port>:PARity?  
Returns parity setting of the specified port.  
XYZ  
This query returns the parity setting of the specified port.  
Expanded Syntax  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial1:PARity?  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial2:PARity?  
Response  
EVEN, ODD, NONE, or ONE is returned.  
59551A  
:SYSTem:PRESet  
R
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial1:SBITs . . .  
Sets the stop bits value of PORT 1.  
Not affected  
NON-VOLATILE  
This command sets the stop bits value of PORT 1.  
Expanded Syntax  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial1:SBITs 1 or 2  
Parameter  
The possible stop bits values that can be entered are 1 or 2.  
Context Dependencies  
The stop bits value is stored in non-volatile memory. It is unaffected by  
powerup and :SYSTem:PRESet.  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial1:PRESet sets the stop bits value to 1, which  
is the factory-default value.  
5-106  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Serial Interface Communication  
Configuring I/O Ports ___________________________ (continued)  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
R, F  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:<port>:SBITs?  
Returns the stop bits value of the specified port.  
dd  
This query returns the stop bits value of specified port.  
Expanded Syntax  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial1:SBITs?  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial2:SBITs?  
Operating and Programming Guide  
5-107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Serial Interface Communication  
Recovering the Last Query Response _____________________  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
:DIAGnostic:QUERy:RESPonse?  
Returns the last response item issued through the Receiver's  
serial interface for use in an error recovery process.  
Format depends on the last  
issued query.  
This query returns the last response item issued through the Receiver’s serial  
interface for use in an error recovery process.  
In the case of a serial interface data transmission error, this query can be used  
to get the last response item which may otherwise be unavailable because of  
the side effects of the original command. For example, the :SYST:ERRor? query  
removes the oldest entry from the error queue, so to see the entry again  
following a data transmission error, use :DIAG:QUER:RESP? instead of  
repeating the original command.  
Response  
The format depends on the last issued query.  
5-108  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Receiver Initialization  
Receiver Initialization  
The following commands are provided to allow you to initialize or preset the  
serial interface port(s) and the Receiver to their factory shipment values.  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial1:PRESet  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial2:PRESet (59551A Only)  
:SYSTem:PRESet  
Operating and Programming Guide  
5-109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Receiver Initialization  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:<port>:PRESet  
Sets the specified port configuration to its factory-default  
values.  
EVENT  
This command is an event that sets specified port parameters to their  
factory-default values.  
Expanded Syntax  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial1:PRESet  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial2:PRESet  
Factory-Default Settings for PORT 1 of the 59551A  
Parameter  
Software Pacing  
Baud Rate  
Parity  
Default  
NONE  
9600  
NONE  
8
Possible Choices  
XON or NONE  
1200, 2400, 9600, or 19200  
EVEN, ODD, or NONE  
7 or 8  
Data Bits  
Stop Bits  
1
1 or 2  
Full Duplex  
ON  
ON or OFF  
Factory-Default Settings for PORT 1 of the 58503B and PORT 2 of the  
59551A  
Parameter  
Software Pacing  
Baud Rate  
Parity  
Default  
NONE  
9600  
NONE  
8
Possible Choices  
XON or NONE  
1200, 2400, 9600, or 19200  
EVEN, ODD, NONE, or ONE  
Fixed at 7 when parity is even or odd.  
Fixed at 8 when parity is none.  
Fixed (no choices available)  
ON or OFF  
Data Bits  
Stop Bits  
1
Full Duplex  
ON  
Context Dependencies  
The SERial1 preset command only is valid if transmitted on the rear-panel  
(PORT 1).  
:SYSTem:PRESet  
Restores the Receiver parameters settings to their  
factory-default values.  
EVENT  
This command is an event that restores the Receiver parameters settings to  
their factory shipment or factory-default values (see the following Table 5-2).  
NOTE  
Issuing this command will result in disruption of all of the following: GPS  
satellite tracking, reference oscillator frequency, 1 PPS output timing, and  
Receiver status information.  
5-110  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Receiver Initialization  
Table 5-2. System Preset (Factory Default) Parameter Settings  
Summary  
Commands  
:SYSTem:PRESet  
*
*ESE ...  
0 (NV ) — See footnotes on the  
bottom of the next page  
*SRE ...  
136 (NV)  
:DIAGnostic:LOG:CLEar  
Log is cleared.  
:DIAGnostic:LOG:COUNt?  
:DIAGnostic:QUERy:RESPonse?  
2
cleared.  
:FORMat:DATA ...  
:GPS:POSition ...  
ASCII (NV)  
N,0,0,0,E,0,0,0,0 (NV)  
LAST is also set to this position.  
(NV)  
:GPS:POSition:HOLD:LAST?  
N,0,0,0,E,0,0,0,0 (NV)  
0 (NV)  
:GPS:POSition:HOLD:STATe?  
:GPS:POSition:SURVey:STATe ...  
:GPS:POSition:SURVey:STATe:POWerup ...  
ONCE  
ON (NV)  
:GPS:REFerence:ADELay ...  
0.0 (NV)  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:EMANgle ...  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:IGNore:STATe? ...  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:IGNore ...  
10 (NV)  
0 for every PRN.  
No satellites ignored (NV)  
All satellites included (NV)  
1 for every PRN.  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:INCLude ...  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:INCLude:STATe? ...  
:PTIMe:TZONe ...  
0,0 (NV)  
:PULSe:CONTinuous:PERiod ...  
:PULSe:CONTinuous:STATe ...  
1 (NV)  
OFF (NV)  
:PULSe:STARt:DATE ...  
:PULSe:STARt:TIME ...  
1994,1,1 (NV)  
0,0,0 (NV)  
:SENSe:DATA?  
Data is cleared.  
**  
:SENSe:DATA:MEMory:OVERflow:COUNt?  
:SENSe:DATA:MEMory:SAVE ...  
:SENSe:DATA:POINts?  
All counts are cleared (V ).  
FIRSt (NV)  
All responses become 0 (zero).  
(V)  
:SENSe:DATA:TSTamp? ...  
All timestamps cleared.  
Operating and Programming Guide  
5-111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Receiver Initialization  
Table 5-2. System Preset (Factory Default) Parameter Settings  
Summary (Continued)  
Commands  
:SYSTem:PRESet  
:STATus:OPERation:ENABle ...  
36 (NV)  
:STATus:OPERation:HARDware:ENABle ...  
:STATus:OPERation:HARDware:NTRansition ...  
:STATus:OPERation:HARDware:PTRansition ...  
:STATus:OPERation:HOLDover:ENABle ...  
:STATus:OPERation:HOLDover:NTRansition ...  
:STATus:OPERation:HOLDover:PTRansition ...  
8191 (NV)  
0 (NV)  
5119 (NV)  
8 (NV)  
0 (NV)  
15 (NV)  
:STATus:OPERation:NTRansition ...  
0 (NV)  
:STATus:OPERation:POWerup:ENABle ...  
:STATus:OPERation:POWerup:NTRansition ...  
:STATus:OPERation:POWerup:PTRansition ...  
7 (NV)  
0 (NV)  
7 (NV)  
:STATus:OPERation:PTRansition ...  
127 (NV)  
:STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition:USER ...  
:STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle ...  
Cleared (NV)  
3 (NV)  
:STATus:QUEStionable:NTRansition ...  
:STATus:QUEStionable:PTRansition ...  
0 (NV)  
2 (NV)  
:SYNChronization:HOLDover:DURation?  
0,0 (Even if there was a prior  
holdover, its duration will be lost.)  
:SYNChronization:HOLDover:DURation:THReshold ...  
86400 (that is, 1 day), (NV)  
POWerup  
:SYNChronization:STATe?  
:SYSTem:ERRor?  
Error queue is cleared.  
"PRIMARY"  
:SYSTem:LANGuage ...  
* NV stands for non-volatile memory.  
** V stands for volatile memory.  
5-112  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Receiver Identification/Upgrade  
Receiver Identification/Upgrade  
The commands provided in this section allow you to query the identification of  
the Receiver, and to perform firmware upgrades in the field after you obtain a  
new firmware disk.  
! Reading Product Identification  
*IDN?  
! Installing Firmware via I/O PORT 1  
*CLS  
:DIAGnostic:DOWNload ...  
:DIAGnostic:ERASe  
:DIAGnostic:ERASe?  
:SYSTem:ERRor?  
:SYSTem:LANGuage ...  
:SYSTem:LANGuage?  
Operating and Programming Guide  
5-113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Receiver Identification/Upgrade  
Reading Product Identification ___________________________  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
*IDN?  
Returns the Receiver identification.  
ASCII Data  
This query returns the Receiver identification.  
Response  
A sequence of ASCII-encoded bytes:  
HEWLETT-PACKARD, 59551A, XXXXYZZZZZ, WWWW – V  
where 59551A is the product model number, XXXXYZZZZZ is the product  
serial number, and WWWW is the product’s firmware revision date code,  
and V is the hardware revision letter.  
In the product serial number (XXXXYZZZZZ):  
XXXX is a four-digit prefix that identifies a series of instruments.  
Y identifies the country in which the instrument was manufactured  
(e.g., the “A” in 3426A000123 stands for America).  
ZZZZZ is a five-digit suffix that identifies a particular instrument  
within a series.  
For example,  
HEWLETT-PACKARD, 59551A,3426A00123,3422 – A  
This query should be the last query in a terminated program message;  
otherwise, error -440 is generated.  
Context Dependencies  
Preparatory to installation of new product firmware, the instrument is  
switched to the “INSTALL” language, available only on PORT 1.  
The “INSTALL” language includes an *IDN? query which returns the revision  
identification for the installation firmware. The response format is the same as  
described above for the instrument’s “PRIMARY” language, but the  
identification code may be different.  
5-114  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Receiver Identification/Upgrade  
Installing Firmware via I/O PORT 1 ______________________  
The commands in this section represent the command set of the “INSTALL”  
language. The “INSTALL” language is part of a highly-specialized set of  
features used to erase the Receiver’s firmware, and to install a new firmware  
revision. It should be selected only when firmware installation is required.  
The “INSTALL” language offers the limited number of commands and queries  
which are documented in this section. This set is designed to provide the  
Receiver status and control capability required during firmware upgrade.  
NOTE  
The SatStat program provides a Service menu which automates firmware  
installation.  
R
*CLS  
Clears errors.  
EVENT  
This command clears errors.  
R
:DIAGnostic:DOWNload . . .  
Sends down a MotorolaS-record.  
EVENT  
This command sends down a MotorolaS-record.  
Expanded Syntax  
:DIAGnostic:DOWNload <Motorola S-record>  
R
:DIAGnostic:ERASe  
!
Erases the flash EEPROM.  
EVENT  
This command erases the flash EEPROM. It should ONLY be sent to the  
Receiver as a preparatory step during firmware upgrade. Erasing flash  
EEPROM will disable the instrument until flash EEPROM is reloaded with  
factory-supplied instrument firmware.  
Operating and Programming Guide  
5-115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Receiver Identification/Upgrade  
Installing Firmware via I/O Port 1 ______________ (continued)  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
R
:DIAGnostic:ERASe?  
Verifies flash EEPROM has been erased.  
0 or 1  
This query verifies the flash EEPROM has been erased.  
Response  
A value of 1 indicates that flash EEPROM has been erased.  
This condition normally occurs when the instrument software in flash  
EEPROM is erased in preparation for installation of a more recent software  
revision. That is, after command :DIAG:ERASe has been issued and erase is  
complete, the :DIAG:ERASe? query response is “1”.  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
R
:SYSTem:ERRor?  
Returns the oldest error in the Error Queue and removes  
that error from the queue (first in, first out).  
dd, “XYZ”  
This query returns the oldest error in the Error Queue and removes that error  
from the queue (first in, first out).  
See Appendix A, “Error Messages,” in this guide for detailed error information.  
Response  
The error response format is: <error_number>,"<error_description>", where  
The <error_number> is an integer transferred as ASCII bytes in <NR1>  
format (integer). The range is -32768 to 32767.  
Negative error numbers are defined by the SCPI standard.  
Positive error numbers are defined specifically for this Receiver.  
An error number value of zero indicates that the Error Queue is empty.  
The maximum length of the <error_description> is 255 characters.  
5-116  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Receiver Identification/Upgrade  
Installing Firmware via I/O Port 1 ______________ (continued)  
Context Dependencies  
:SYSTem:PRESet clears the Error Queue.  
The queue is cleared (emptied) on *CLS, power-on, or upon reading the last  
error from the queue.  
If the Error Queue overflows, the last error in the queue is replaced with the  
error -350, "Queue overflow". Any time the queue overflows, the least recent  
errors remain in the queue and the most recent error is discarded.  
The maximum length of the Error Queue is 30.  
:SYSTem:PRESet  
:SYSTem:LANGuage . . .  
“PRIMARY”  
Switches the operation mode (primary or install) of the  
Receiver.  
NON-VOLATILE  
This command switches the operation mode (primary or install) of the  
Receiver.  
Expanded Syntax  
:SYSTem:LANGuage "INSTALL" or "PRIMARY".  
Parameter  
The “INSTALL” language is part of a highly-specialized set of features used to  
erase the Receiver’s firmware, and to install a new firmware revision. It should  
be selected only when firmware installation is required.  
The “INSTALL” language offers the limited number of commands and queries  
which are documented in this section. This set is designed to provide the  
Receiver status and control capability required during firmware upgrade.  
NOTE  
The SatStat program provides a Service menu which automates firmware  
installation.  
The “PRIMARY” language provides the capabilities required for normal  
Receiver operation. If the “INSTALL” language has been selected as part of the  
firmware upgrade, the “PRIMARY” language should be selected after the  
upgrade to restore normal operation.  
Operating and Programming Guide  
5-117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Receiver Identification/Upgrade  
Installing Firmware via I/O Port 1 ______________ (continued)  
RESPONSE FORMAT  
R
:SYSTem:LANGuage?  
Identifies the operation mode (primary or install) of the  
Receiver.  
“XYZ”  
This query identifies the operation mode (primary or install) of the Receiver.  
Response  
“INSTALL” or “PRIMARY” is returned.  
5-118  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A
Error Messages  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A Error Messages  
Introduction  
Introduction  
This appendix explains how to read any errors from the Receiver,  
discusses the error queue, types of errors and general error behavior,  
and provides a table of all of the Receiver’s errors and their probable  
causes.  
Reading an Error  
Executing the :SYSTEM:ERROR? command reads the oldest error from  
the error queue and erases that error from the queue. The :SYST:ERR?  
response has the form:  
<error number>, <error string>  
An example response is:  
-113,"Undefined header"  
Positive error numbers are specific to the Receiver. Negative error  
numbers are command language related and are discussed later in this  
appendix.  
All errors set a corresponding bit in the Standard Event Status  
Register (see Figure 5-1 on page 5-49).  
A-2  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A Error Messages  
Error Queue  
Error Queue  
As errors are detected, they are placed in an error queue. This queue is  
first in, first out. That is, if there has been more than one error, the  
first one in the queue is read out with :SYST:ERR?. Subsequent  
responses continue until the queue is empty.  
If the error queue overflows, the last error in the queue is replaced  
with error -350, "Queue overflow". Any time the queue overflows, the  
least recent errors remain in the queue, and the most recent error is  
discarded. The length of the Receiver’s error queue is 30 (29 positions  
for the error messages, and 1 position for the “Queue overflow” error).  
Reading an error from the head of the queue removes that error from  
the queue, and opens a position at the tail of the queue for a new error,  
if one is subsequently detected.  
When all errors have been read from the queue, further error queries  
return +0, "No error".  
The error queue is cleared when any of the following occur:  
• Upon power-on.  
• Upon receipt of a *CLS command.  
• Upon reading the last item from the queue.  
Operating and Programming Guide  
A-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A Error Messages  
Error Types  
Error Types  
Error numbers are categorized by type as shown in Table A-1. Each  
error is listed in Table A-2.  
Table A-1. Error Types  
Error Number  
+0  
Error Type  
No Error  
100 to 199  
200 to 299  
300 to 350  
400 to 499  
Syntactic Errors  
Semantic Errors  
Hardware/Firmware Errors  
Query Errors  
The first error described in each class (for example, 100, 200, 300,  
400) is a “generic” error.  
No Error  
The :SYST:ERR? response +0, "No error" indicates that the Receiver  
has no errors. The error queue is empty when every error in the queue  
has been read (:SYST:ERR? query) or the queue was cleared by power-  
on or *CLS.  
Syntactic Error  
An <error number> in the range [100 to 199] indicates that an IEEE  
488.2 syntax error has been detected by the Receiver’s parser.  
The occurrence of any error in this class causes the syntactic error bit  
(bit 5) in the Event Status Register to be set. One of the following  
events has occurred:  
• An IEEE 488.2 syntax error has been detected by the parser.  
That is, a controller-to-Receiver message was received that is in  
violation of the IEEE 488.2 Standard. Possible violations include a  
data element that violates the Receiver listening formats or whose  
type is unacceptable to the Receiver.  
• An unrecognized header was received. Unrecognized headers  
include incorrect Receiver-specific headers and incorrect or  
unimplemented IEEE 488.2 Common Commands.  
Events that generate syntactic errors do not generate semantic errors,  
hardware/firmware errors, or query errors.  
A-4  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A Error Messages  
Error Types  
Semantic Error  
An <error number> in the range [200 to 299] indicates that an error  
has been detected by the Receiver’s execution control block.  
The occurrence of any error in this class causes the semantic error bit  
(bit 4) in the Event Status Register to be set. One of the following  
events has occurred:  
• A <PROGRAM DATA> element following a header was evaluated  
by the Receiver as outside of its legal input range or is otherwise  
inconsistent with the Receiver’s capabilities.  
• A valid program message could not be properly executed due to  
some Receiver condition.  
Semantic errors are reported by the Receiver after rounding and  
expression evaluation operations have been taken place. Rounding a  
numeric data element, for example, is not reported as a semantic error.  
Events that generate semantic errors do not generate syntactic errors,  
hardware/firmware errors, or query errors.  
Hardware/Firmware Error  
An <error number> in the range [300 to 399] or [+1 to +32767]  
indicates that the Receiver has detected an error that is not a syntactic  
error, a query error, or a semantic error; some Receiver operations did  
not properly complete, possibly due to an abnormal hardware or  
firmware condition. These codes are also used for self-test response  
errors. The occurrence of any error in this class causes the  
hardware/firmware error bit (bit 3) in the Event Status Register to  
be set.  
Query Error  
An <error number> in the range [400 to 499] indicates that the  
output queue control of the Receiver has detected a problem with the  
message exchange protocol. The occurrence of any error in this class  
should cause the query error bit (bit 2) in the Event Status Register to  
be set. One of the following is true:  
• An attempt is being made to read data from the output queue when  
no output is either present or pending.  
• Data in the output queue has been lost.  
Operating and Programming Guide  
A-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A Error Messages  
General Error Behavior  
General Error Behavior  
For Commands (i.e., non-query; doesn’t provide a response):  
• For any command that has numeric parameters, if the value is out  
of range (beyond either the min or max allowed settings), the value  
will be clipped to the appropriate limit and error 222 will be  
generated (data out-of-range error) as an indication that the value  
wasn’t set to the requested value.  
There are some commands having numeric parameters where the  
clipping behavior described above doesn’t make sense. These  
include the satellite include and ignore commands, and the status  
system mask commands. For these commands, an out-of-bounds  
value is ignored and error 222 is generated. Also, a single  
out-of-bounds value may cause the entire command to be ignored.  
For example, GPS:SAT:TRAC:INCL 3,87,5 will be entirely ignored  
because 87 is out-of-range (i.e., 3 and 5 do not become included even  
though they are in-range).  
• Commands with multiple numeric parameters can produce  
multiple errors. For example, if the initial date command is sent as  
GPS:INIT:TIME 25,66,7, the actual programmed value will be  
23:59:00 (23 is max hour, 59 is max minute, 0 is min second) and  
three out-of-range errors will be generated. As always, only a single  
prompt will be returned, but in this case three errors will be in the  
error queue (de-queued via SYST:ERR? or *CLS).  
• Numeric parameters between in-range values are rounded to the  
closest value. For example, sending GPS:REF:ADEL 1.7 ns will set  
the antenna delay to 2 ns.  
For Queries (response-generating commands)  
• If the query produces an error, there will not be a response (other  
than the prompt that always occurs).  
• If the query includes a numeric parameter, and that parameter is  
out of range, error 222 will be generated and there won’t be a  
response (this is consistent with the prior bullet). An example of  
this would be DIAG:LOG:READ? 25 when there are fewer than  
25 messages in the log. Note that for this specific example, to get  
the most recent log entry, simply use DIAG:LOG:READ?.  
• Another way you can view this: if you get a query response you can  
know that it is responding precisely to the question asked by the  
query.  
A-6  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A Error Messages  
List of Errors  
List of Errors  
Table A-2 lists and describes the error messages  
Table A-2. Error Messages  
Number  
Error String  
Cause  
+0  
No error  
The error queue is empty. Every error in the queue has been read (SYSTem:ERRor?  
query) or the queue was cleared by power-on or *CLS.  
-100  
Command error  
This is the generic syntax error used if the Receiver cannot detect more specific  
errors.  
-101  
-102  
-103  
-104  
Invalid character  
Syntax error  
A syntactic element contains a character that is invalid for that type.  
An unrecognized command or data type was encountered.  
Invalid separator  
Data type error  
The parser was expecting a separator and encountered an illegal character.  
The parser recognized a data element different than one allowed. For example,  
numeric or string data was expected, but block data was received.  
-108  
-109  
-112  
-113  
-120  
Parameter not allowed  
Missing parameter  
More parameters were received than expected for the header.  
Fewer parameters were received than required for the header.  
Program mnemonic too long The header or character data element contains more than twelve characters.  
Undefined header  
Numeric data error  
The header is undefined. For example, the command ":HELLO".  
This error, as well as errors -121 through -129, is generated when parsing a data  
element which appears to be numeric. This particular error message is used when  
the Receiver cannot detect a more specific error.  
-121  
Invalid character in number An invalid character for the data type being parsed was encountered. For example, a  
"9" in ocatal data.  
-123  
-124  
Exponent too large  
Too many digits  
Numeric overflow.  
The mantissa of a decimal numeric data element contained more than 255 digits  
excluding leading zeros.  
-128  
-131  
Numeric data not allowed  
Invalid suffix  
A legal numeric data element was received, but the Receiver does not accept one in  
this position for the header.  
The suffix does not follow the syntax described in IEEE 488.2 or the suffix is  
inappropriate for the Receiver.  
-134  
-138  
-141  
-148  
-150  
Suffix too long  
The suffix contained more than 12 characters.  
Suffix not allowed  
Invalid character data  
Character data not allowed  
String data error  
A suffix was encountered after a numeric element that does not allow a suffix.  
The character data element contains an invalid character.  
A legal character data element was encountered where prohibited by the Receiver.  
This error can be generated when parsing a string data element. This particular error  
message is used if the Receiver cannot detect a more specific error.  
-151  
-158  
Invalid string data  
A string data element was expected but was invalid for some reason.  
String data not allowed  
A string data element was encountered but was not allowed by the Receiver at this  
point in parsing.  
-170  
Expression error  
This error can be generated when parsing an expression data element. It is used if  
the Receiver cannot detect a more specific error.  
Operating and Programming Guide  
A-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A Error Messages  
List of Errors  
Table A-2. Error Messages (Continued)  
Number  
Error String  
Cause  
-178  
Expression data not allowed Expression data was encountered but was not allowed by the Receiver at this point  
in parsing.  
-200  
-220  
Execution error  
Parameter error  
This is the generic syntax error if the Receiver cannot detect more specific errors.  
Indicates that a program data element error occurred. This error is used when the  
Receiver cannot detect more specific errors.  
-221  
-222  
-223  
Settings conflict  
Data out of range  
Too much data  
Indicates that a legal program data element was parsed but could not be executed  
due to the current Receiver state.  
Indicates that a legal program data element was parsed but could not be executed  
because the interpreted value is outside the legal range defined by the Receiver.  
Indicates that a legal program data element of block, expression, or string type was  
received that contained more data than the Receiver could handle due to memory or  
related receiver-specific requirements.  
-224  
Illegal parameter value  
Used where exact value, from a list of possible values, was expected (but not  
received).  
-230  
-240  
Data corrupt or stale  
Hardware error  
No valid data available.  
Indicates that a legal program command or query could not be executed because of  
a hardware problem in the Receiver.  
-241  
Hardware missing  
Indicates that a legal program command or query could not be executed because of  
missing Receiver hardware.  
-300  
-310  
-311  
-315  
-321  
-330  
-350  
-360  
Device-specific error  
System error  
This is the generic device-dependent error.  
Indicates that a system error occurred.  
Memory error  
Occurs on EEPROM write failure.  
Configuration memory lost  
Out of memory  
Could happen on powerup or preset if a nonvolatile memory problem is detected.  
Indicates that the Receiver has detected that insufficient memory is available.  
Indicates at least one failure occurred when *TST? or :DIAG:TEST? was executed.  
An error occurred but was not recorded because the error queue is full.  
Self-test failed  
Queue overflow  
Communication error  
This is the generic communication error for devices that cannot detect the more  
specific errors described for errors -361 through -363.  
-361  
-362  
-363  
-440  
Parity error in program  
message  
Parity bit not correct when data received for example, on a serial port.  
Framing error in program  
message  
A stop bit was not detected when data was received. For example, on a serial port  
(for example, a baud rate mismatch).  
Input buffer overrun  
Software or hardware input buffer on serial port overflows with data caused by  
improper or nonexistent pacing.  
Query UNTERMINATED  
after indefinite response  
Indicates that a query was received in the same program message after a query  
requesting an indefinite response (e.g., *IDN? or :PTIM:TCOD? or :SYST:STAT?).  
.
A-8  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B
Command Syntax and Style  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix B Command Syntax and Style  
Appendix Contents  
Appendix Contents  
This appendix provides an overview of the Standard Commands for  
Programming Instrument (SCPI) syntax and style to help you program  
the Receiver. A section that lists SCPI reference documentation is also  
provided.  
This appendix is organized as follows:  
page B-7  
page B-9  
page B-12  
Using Multiple Commands  
Elements of Response Messages  
• Reference Documentation  
B-2  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix B Command Syntax and Style  
Command Types, Format, and Elements  
Command Types, Format, and Elements  
Command Types  
There are two types of GPS Receiver programming commands: IEEE  
488.2 Common Commands and Standard Commands for  
Programmable Instruments (SCPI). The IEEE 488.2 Common  
Commands control and manage communications between the  
Receiver and the controller, terminal, or personal computer. The SCPI  
commands control instrument functions. The format of each type of  
command is described in the following paragraphs.  
Command Formats  
Common Command Format  
The IEEE 488.2 Standard defines the Common commands as  
commands that perform functions like reset, self-test, status byte  
query, and identification. Common commands always begin with the  
asterisk (*) character, and may include parameters. The command  
keyword is separated from the first parameter by a space character.  
Some examples of Common commands are as follows:  
*IDN?  
*ESE 32  
SCPI Command and Query Format  
SCPI commands perform functions like instrument setup. A subsystem  
command has a hierarchical structure that usually consists of a top  
level (or root) keyword, one or more lower-level keywords, and  
parameters. The following example shows a command and its  
associated query:  
:GPS:POSition:SURVey:STATe ONCE  
:GPS:POSition:SURVey:STATe?  
GPS is a root-level keyword with POSition the second-level keyword,  
SURVey the third-level keyword, and STATe the fourth-level. ONCE is  
the command parameter.  
Operating and Programming Guide  
B-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Appendix B Command Syntax and Style  
Command Types, Format, and Elements  
Elements of SCPI Commands  
A program command or query is composed of functional elements that  
include a header (keywords with colon separators), program data, and  
terminators. These elements are sent to the Receiver over the serial  
interface as a sequence of ASCII characters. Examples of a typical  
Common Command and Subsystem Command are:  
*CLS  
:SYST:ERR?  
Common Command Syntax  
Figure B-1 shows the simplified syntax of a Common Command.  
You must use a space (SP) between the command mnemonic and the  
parameter in a Common Command.  
sp  
mnemonic  
parameter  
*
?
NOTE: sp = space. ASCII character decimal 32  
Figure B-1. Simplified Common Command Syntax Diagram  
Subsystem Command Syntax  
Figure B-2 shows the simplified syntax of a Subsystem Command.  
You must use a space (SP) between the last command mnemonic and  
the first parameter in a Subsystem Command. Note that if you send  
more than one parameter with a single command, you must separate  
adjacent parameters with a comma.  
,
:
sp  
:
mnemonic  
parameter  
?
suffix  
NOTE: sp = space. ASCII character decimal 32  
Figure B-2. Simplified Program Command Syntax Diagram  
B-4  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Appendix B Command Syntax and Style  
Command Types, Format, and Elements  
Abbreviated Commands  
The command syntax shows most keywords as a mixture of upper and  
lower case letters. Upper case letters indicate the abbreviated spelling  
for the command. For better program readability, you may send the  
entire keyword. The Receiver accepts either command form and is not  
case sensitive.  
For example, if the command syntax shows SYNChronization, then  
SYNC and SYNCHRONIZATION are both acceptable forms.  
Other forms of SYNChronization, such as SYNCHR or SYNCHRONIZ  
will generate an error. You may use upper and/or lower case letters.  
Therefore, SYNCHRONIZATION, synchronization, SyNchROnizatioN,  
and SYnC are all acceptable.  
Keyword Separator  
A colon (:) always separates one keyword from the next lower-level  
keyword as shown below:  
:SYST:ERR?  
Parameter Data Types  
Table B-1 contains explanations and examples of parameter types.  
Parameter types may be numeric value, Boolean, literal, NRf, string,  
or non-decimal numeric.  
Table B-1. Command and Query Parameter Types  
TYPE  
EXPLANATIONS AND EXAMPLES  
<numeric value>  
Accepts all commonly used decimal representation of numbers including optional signs,  
decimal points, and scientific notation:  
123, 123e2, -123, 1.23e2, .123, 1.23e2, 1.23000E01.  
Special cases include MINimum and MAXimum as follows:  
MINimum selects minimum value available.  
MAXimum selects maximum value available.  
Queries using MINimum or MAXimum return the associated numeric value.  
<Boolean>  
Represents a single binary condition that is either true or false:  
1 or ON, 0 or OFF (Query response returns only 1 or 0.)  
An <NRf> is rounded to an integer. A non-zero value is interpreted as 1.  
<literal>  
Selects from a finite number of choices. These parameters use mnemonics to represent  
each valid setting. An example of a <literal> parameter is: GPS  
<NRf>  
Flexible numeric representation. Only positive integers are used for NRf parameters in  
the instrument.  
<string>  
A string parameter is delimited by either single quotes or double quotes. Within the  
quotes, any characters in the ASCII B-bit code may be specified.  
<non-decimal numeric>  
Format for specifying hexadecimal (#H1F), octal (#Q1077), and binary (#B10101011)  
numbers using ASCII characters. May be used in :STATus subsystem commands.  
Operating and Programming Guide  
B-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix B Command Syntax and Style  
Command Types, Format, and Elements  
Parameter Separator  
If you send more than one parameter with a single command, you must  
separate adjacent parameters with a comma.  
Query Parameters  
All selectable <numeric value> parameters can be queried to return  
the minimum or maximum values they are capable of being set to by  
sending a MINimum or MAXimum parameter after the “?.”  
For example, consider the :GPS:REF:ADEL? query.  
If you send the query without specifying a parameter  
(:GPS:REF:ADEL?), the present antenna delay value is returned.  
If you send the MIN parameter (using :GPS:REF:ADEL? MIN),  
the command returns the minimum value currently available. If you  
send the MAX parameter, the command returns the maximum value  
currently available. Be sure to place a space between the question  
mark and the parameter.  
Suffixes  
A suffix is the combination of suffix elements and multipliers that can  
be used to interpret the <numeric value> sent. If a suffix is not  
specified, the Receiver assumes that <numeric value> is unscaled  
(that is, Volts, seconds, etc.)  
For example, the following two commands are equivalent:  
:GPS:REF:ADELay 100 NS  
:GPS:REF:ADELay 100E-9  
Suffix Elements  
Suffix elements, such as HZ (Hertz), S (seconds), V (Volts), OHM  
(Ohms), PCT (percent), and DEG (degrees) are allowed within this  
format.  
B-6  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix B Command Syntax and Style  
Command Types, Format, and Elements  
Suffix Multipliers  
Table B-2 lists the suffix multipliers that can be used with suffix  
elements (except PCT and DEG).  
Table B-2. Suffix Multipliers  
DEFINITION  
1E9  
MNEMONIC  
NAME  
GIGA  
MEGA  
KILO  
G
1E6  
MA (or M for OHM and HZ)*  
1E3  
K
1E-3  
M (except for OHM and HZ)*  
MILLI  
MICRO  
NANO  
PICO  
1E-6  
U
N
P
1E-9  
1E-12  
* The suffix units, MHZ and MOHM, are special cases that should not be confused with  
<suffix multiplier>HZ and <suffix multiplier>OHM.  
Command Terminator  
A command may be terminated with a line feed (ASCII LF character  
10 decimal), a carriage return (ASCII CR character 13 decimal), or one  
followed immediately by the other in any order.  
Using Multiple Commands  
Program Messages  
Program Messages are a combination of one or more properly  
formatted SCPI Commands. Program messages always go from the  
DTE to the Receiver. They are sent to the Receiver over the Receiver’s  
serial interface as a sequence of ASCII characters.  
Program Message Syntax  
Figure B-3 shows the simplified syntax of a program message. You can  
see Common Commands and Subsystem Commands in the same  
program message. If you send more than one command in one message,  
you must separate adjacent commands with a semicolon.  
Operating and Programming Guide  
B-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix B Command Syntax and Style  
Command Types, Format, and Elements  
;
<carriage return>  
Subsystem Command  
Common Command  
<carriage return>  
<new line>  
<new line>  
<carriage return>  
<new line>  
NOTE:  
<new line> = ASCII character decimal 10  
<carriage return> = ASCII character decimal 13  
Figure B-3. Simplified Program Message Syntax Diagram  
When using IEEE 488.2 Common commands with SCPI Subsystem  
commands on the same line, use a semicolon between adjacent  
commands. For example:  
*CLS;:SYST:ERR?  
When multiple SCPI Subsystem commands are sent in one program  
message, the first command is always referenced to the root node.  
Subsequent commands, separated by “;”, are referenced to the same  
level as the preceding command if no “:” is present immediately after  
the command separator (the semicolon).  
For example, sending  
:GPS:INIT:DATE 1994,7,4;TIME 12,34,56  
is equivalent to sending:  
:GPS:INIT:DATE 1994,7,4  
:GPS:INIT:TIME 12,34,56  
or  
:GPS:INIT:DATE 1994,7,4;:GPS:INIT:TIME 12,34,56  
The “:” must be present to distinguish another root level command.  
For example:  
:SYNC:HOLD:DUR?;:GPS:SAT:VIS:PRED?  
is equivalent to sending:  
:SYNC:HOLD:DUR?  
:GPS:SAT:VIS:PRED?  
B-8  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix B Command Syntax and Style  
Command Types, Format, and Elements  
If the “:”(which is following the “;” and is in front of GPS) is omitted,  
the Receiver assumes that the second command is  
:SYNC:HOLD:GPS:SAT:VIS:PRED?  
and generates a syntax error.  
Elements of Response Messages  
Response Messages  
Response messages are data sent from the Receiver to the DTE in  
response to a query. (A query is a command followed by a question  
mark. Queries are used to find out how the Receiver is currently  
configured and to transfer data from the Receiver to the DTE.)  
After receiving a query, the Receiver interrogates the requested  
configuration and issues its response message as soon as possible.  
The message is transmitted across the serial interface to the DTE.  
Response Message Syntax  
Figure B-4 shows the simplified syntax of a Response Message.  
Response messages may contain both commas and semicolon  
separators. When a single query command returns multiple values,  
a comma is used to separate each item. When multiple queries are sent  
in the same program message, the groups of data corresponding to  
each query are separated by a semicolon.  
;
,
response data  
<carriage return>  
<new line>  
NOTE:  
<new line> = ASCII character decimal 10  
<carriage return> = ASCII character decimal 13  
; = multiple response separator (ASCII character decimal 59)  
, = data separator within a response (ASCII character decimal 44)  
Figure B-4. Simplified Response Message Syntax Diagram  
Operating and Programming Guide  
B-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix B Command Syntax and Style  
Command Types, Format, and Elements  
Response Formats  
Table B-3 contains explanations of response formats.  
Table B-3. Response Formats  
Format  
dd  
Description  
This numeric format represents an integer (e.g., +9).  
+
<digit>  
The maximum number of characters in dd response data is 17 (maximum  
16 digits, 1 sign).  
dd, ...  
This numeric format represents a comma-separated list of integers  
(e.g., +1,+2,+3).  
d.d  
This numeric format represents a fixed (e.g., +10.5).  
+
.
<digit>  
<digit>  
d.dEe  
This numeric format represents a floating-point number (e.g., +1.00E+000).  
+
.
<digit>  
E
<digit>  
+
<digit>  
The maximum number of characters in d.dEe response data is 13 (maximum  
6 mantissa digits, 2 signs, 1 decimal point, 1 'E' character, 3 exponent digits).  
d.dEe,  
This numeric format represents comma-separated list of floating-numbers  
(e.g., +1.00000E-009, +2.00000E-009, +5.00000E-009).  
0 or 1  
A single ASCII-encoded byte, 0 or 1, is returned for the query of settings that  
use ON, OFF, 1, or 0 parameters.  
B-10  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix B Command Syntax and Style  
Command Types, Format, and Elements  
Table B-3. Response Formats (Continued)  
Format  
XYZ  
Description  
ASCII-encoded bytes corresponding to the literal used as the command  
parameter.  
alpha  
alpha  
digit  
An example of an alphanumeric response is: NONE  
“XYZ ”  
A string response consists of ASCII characters enclosed by double quotes.  
For example, string data is used for the “<error description>” portion of  
:SYST:ERR? response.  
“XYZ”, ...  
A list of string responses consist of comma-separated ASCII characters  
enclosed by double quotes.  
(e.g., “log 224:19951017.00:00:26:30: Holdover started, GPS”,  
“log 225:19951017.00:00:29:02: GPS lock started”)  
ASCII Data  
Binary Data  
A sequence of ASCII-encoded bytes.  
The syntax is a pound sign (#) followed by a non-zero digit representing the  
number of digits in the subsequent decimal integer. The decimal integer  
specifies the number of 8-bit data bytes being sent. This is followed by the  
actual data. The terminator is a line feed. For example, for transmitting 8 bytes  
of data, the format might be:  
Number of digits  
that follow  
Actual data  
Terminator  
#208<8 bytes of data><carriage return><new line>  
Number of bytes  
to be transmitted  
The “2” indicates the number of digits that follow and the two digits “08” indicate  
the number of data bytes to be transmitted.  
<carriage return> is defined as a single ASCII-encoded byte corresponding to  
13 decimal.  
<new line> is defined as a single ASCII-encoded byte corresponding to  
10 decimal.  
Operating and Programming Guide  
B-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix B Command Syntax and Style  
Reference Documentation  
Reference Documentation  
This section contains a list of documentation related to the use of the  
Receiver’s RS-232C serial port. Additional information that you may  
find useful can be found in the following publications:  
1. Beginner’s Guide to SCPI (HP Part Number H2325-90001,  
July 1990 Edition).  
2. Beginner’s Guide to SCPI, Barry Eppler (Hewlett-Packard  
Press, Addison-Wesley Publishing Co. 1991).  
3. Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments  
(SCPI), Version 1992.0.  
This standard is a guide for the selection of messages to be included  
in programmable instrumentation. It is primarily intended for  
instrument firmware engineers. However, you may find it useful if  
you are programming more than one instrument that claims  
conformance to the SCPI standard. You can verify the use of  
standard SCPI commands in different instruments.  
To obtain a copy of this standard, contact:  
SCPI Consortium  
8380 Hercules, Suite P3  
La Mesa, CA 91942  
Phone: (619) 697-8790  
FAX: (619) 697-5955  
4. The International Institute of Electrical Engineers and  
Electronic Engineers, IEEE Standard 488.2-1987, IEEE  
Standard Codes, Formats, Protocols, and Common  
Commands for Use with ANSI/IEEE Std 488.1-1987  
Programmable Instrumentation.  
This standard defines the underlying message formats and data  
types used in SCPI. It is intended more for firmware engineers  
than for instrument users/programmers. However, it can be useful  
if you need to know the precise definition of specific message  
formats, data type, or common commands.  
To obtain a copy of this standard, write to:  
The Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers Inc.  
345 East 47th Street  
New York, NY 10017 USA  
B-12  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C
Receiver Firmware Installation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Receiver Firmware Installation  
Downloading New Firmware Using SatStat Program  
Downloading New Firmware Using  
SatStat Program  
1 Copy the file of the updated firmware disk to a directory on your PC  
disk drive.  
If you haven’t already installed SatStat, you should install it now  
(follow instructions on the disk label or in the section titled “To Install  
the Automated SatStat Program for Continual Status Updates” in  
Chapter 3, “Visual User Interface,” of this guide).  
2 Start SatStat (easiest way is to double-click on the icon).  
3 You should establish communication with the GPS Receiver.  
This requires connection from a serial RS-232 port on your PC to the  
GPS Receiver’s serial port (a 25-pin RS-232 connection). Assuming  
you’ve got the cable attached to make this connection, you may want to  
check the settings.  
a. Select CommPort, then choose Settings.  
The Communication Settings dialog box is displayed. Unless  
someone has reprogrammed the CommPort settings on the GPS  
Receiver, these settings are probably OK. The one setting that is  
likely to need changing is the Com Port. The application defaults it  
to Com1, but the serial port on your PC may be assigned to a  
different Com Port. Select the appropriate setting. If you are unsure,  
Com1 will be your best bet (worst case, you can cycle through all of  
them until it works).  
b. If you made any changes on this form, select OK, otherwise you can  
just Cancel.  
4 Select CommPort, then choose Port Open.  
The main form of the Receiver Status screen is displayed.  
The application will send some commands to the GPS Receiver and  
then the main form should begin to periodically update every few  
seconds. If you are getting screen updates, proceed to the next step.  
Otherwise, something is wrong with your CommPort settings or  
perhaps the physical connection between your PC and the GPS  
Receiver.  
C-2  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Receiver Firmware Installation  
Downloading New Firmware Using SatStat Program  
NOTE  
Prior to download, interrogate the product, record any custom  
configuration parameters. This step is necessary because  
downloading new instrument firmware will reset all  
parameters to system-preset defaults. Parameters typically  
recorded include:  
• antenna delay  
• elevation mask angle  
• timezone offset  
A table of all system-preset defaults is printed in Table 5-2 on  
page 5-111 in Chapter 5 of this guide; refer to it to identify  
additional parameters whose default values are inappropriate  
for your application. Record the settings you use prior to  
download.  
5 Performing the download works best if the periodic updates are  
disabled. On the main form, select the Function menu, choose Status  
(check mark appears), and choose Disable Updates (check mark  
appears).  
6 Activate the form titled “Control & Query” by clicking anywhere on it.  
Select Service, then choose Download Firmware. This will bring up a  
form titled “Firmware Download”.  
7 Now you need to select the file that you will download. Select the  
control labeled File.  
This brings up a form for file selection. Download files for the GPS  
Receiver have a .s appended to the file name. This form is set to only  
find .s type files. In this case, you want to find and select the filename,  
for example s_3503.s. Depending on where you have placed this file,  
you may have to use this form to navigate for it. If it is on a different  
drive, use the Drives selection in the lower right. Once you’ve located  
s_3503.s select it (clicking on the name is probably the easiest) and  
then select OK. The file, along with its path should now appear in the  
“File to Download” portion of the “Firmware Download” form.  
8 You’re now ready to perform the download. Select the control titled  
Download and an erase warning will appear. This is just a  
double-check to make sure you really want to do this. Assuming you do,  
select Yes, Perform the Download.  
The program will switch the GPS Receiver to the “INSTALL” language,  
erase the flash memory, and begin downloading S-records. The  
S-records are the long character strings that appear in the lower part  
of the form as the downloading process proceeds. The total  
Operating and Programming Guide  
C-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Receiver Firmware Installation  
Downloading New Firmware Using SatStat Program  
downloading time varies depending on the type of PC you have, but  
with communication settings optimized a typical time is about  
30 minutes. Once the download is under way, an estimate of the time  
to complete the process is updated every 100 S-records.  
9 When the downloading has completed, the “Minutes Until Finished”  
field will say “DONE”. You can then select Close on the Firmware  
Download form.  
There are a couple of ways to confirm that the new firmware has been  
installed; the easiest is to just power-cycle the unit. Once it has  
powered up, you can confirm that the new revision is in place by  
selecting Query, then choosing Product ID (from the “Control & Query”  
form) and selecting Send Cmd. The product ID will appear on the  
Control & Query form and should contain the new date code “3503”,  
for example. An alternative way to check the download is to type  
SYST:LANG "PRIMARY" in the edit field on the “Control & Query”  
form and select Send Cmd. This will return the unit to normal  
operating mode without power-cycling. If you do this, you could then  
check the product ID as described above. NOTE: it is expected that in  
early software revisions the alarm will come on the first time you  
power-cycle (or switch to “primary” using SYST:LANG “PRIMARY”).  
If you investigate the alarm, you will find it is the software  
safeguard—it has gone off because you have changed the instrument  
firmware. On subsequent power-ons the alarm will not come on.  
After upgrading instrument firmware, you will need to restore the  
instrument settings recorded prior to the download, and restore the  
instrument and PC communications settings so that BAUD rate and  
echo are set according to the requirements of your installation.  
C-4  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D
Performance Tests  
Verifying Specifications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D Performance Tests  
Introduction  
Introduction  
This appendix provides procedures to test the electrical performance of  
the 58503B and 59551A GPS Receivers specifications listed in and  
Appendix E, “58503B Specifications,” and Appendix F, “59551A  
Specifications,” of the. Two types of testing are provided:  
• Operational Verification, starting on page D-5  
• Complete Performance Tests, starting on page D-17  
Operational Verification  
The Operational Verification operational verification test is an  
abbreviated series of checks that may be performed to give a high  
degree of confidence that the instrument is operating properly without  
performing the Complete Performance Tests. An operational  
verification is useful for incoming inspection, routine maintenance, and  
after instrument repair.  
Complete Performance Tests  
The Complete Performance Tests performance tests verify the  
specifications listed in Appendix E, “58503B Specifications or  
Appendix F, “59551A Specifications.” All tests can be performed  
without access to the inside of the instrument.  
Test Record  
The results of the Operational Verification and Complete Performance  
Tests should be recorded on a copy of the appropriate (i.e., 58503B or  
59551A) Performance Test Record, located at the end of this chapter.  
D-2  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D Performance Tests  
Equipment Required  
Equipment Required  
Table D-1. Recommended Test Equipment  
Instrument  
Required Characteristics  
Recommended Model  
Use*  
Digitizing  
Oscilloscope  
2 channels  
500 MHz bandwidth (repetitive)  
HP 54600B (or  
equivalent)  
OV, P  
Digital Multimeter  
(DMM)  
Microvolt accuracy with leads  
HP 34401A (or  
equivalent)  
OV, P  
OV, P  
P
Terminal or  
computer  
Communication Software, RS-232C  
connection  
Any Model  
Universal Counter  
Resolution: 300 ps or better in T.I.  
Mode  
HP 53132A (or  
equivalent)  
Frequency Standard 1 PPS Source. Jitter: <1 ns rms  
pulse-to-pulse  
HP 5071A (or equivalent)  
P
10 MHz House Standard. Accuracy:  
2X10-12 or better  
50Feedthrough  
____________________________  
HP 10100C (or  
equivalent)  
OV  
50Coaxial Cable  
BNC(m) to BNC(m), 48 inches  
____________________________  
HP 10503A (or  
equivalent)  
P
P
P
P
with BNC connectors  
GPS Antenna or  
Antenna Assembly  
58504A or 58513A  
58518A, 58520A  
58519A, 8521A  
GPS Antenna Cable  
Assembly  
RG-213 or LMR 400 cables with  
TNC (m)-to-N (m) connectors  
Antenna  
Interconnect Cable  
Assembly  
RG-213 or LMR 400 cables with  
N (m)-to-N (m) connectors  
Barrel adapter  
N (f)-to-N (f)  
HP 1250-0777 (or  
equivalent)  
P
*OV = Operational Verification  
P = Performance Tests  
T = Troubleshooting  
Operating and Programming Guide  
D-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D Performance Tests  
Before You Start  
Before You Start  
The time required to acquire lock as described in the following section  
can vary significantly depending on your local conditions. In general, it  
is strongly recommended that your antenna and cables be set up in  
accordance with the information provided in the documents listed  
below prior to performing any of the tests that follow, or the results  
cannot be assumed to be valid.  
Documents providing GPS Antenna System information are:  
Designing Your GPS Antenna System Configuration Guide  
configuration guide, which discusses the components of an  
GPS timing receiver system and how to custom design the  
configuration of your antenna system. Contact your local Sales  
office for a copy of this guide.  
• Information Notes that provide installation procedures for the  
applicable GPS antenna and accessories that you purchase.  
Acquiring lock does not mean that the unit is fully operational and  
meeting specifications. It just means that the GPS Receiver has  
detected enough satellites to start its survey mode to determine its  
precise location. An Internal measurement FFOM (Frequency Figure  
of Merit) becomes 0 when the internal loops reach their proper time  
constants, indicating that the output frequency and 1 PPS signals are  
now fully operational and meeting their specifications. Under the  
worst conditions, the GPS Receiver may take 24 to 72 hours to achieve  
FFOM = 0. FFOM can be monitored in the Reference Outputs  
quadrant of the Receiver Status screen (see the sample status screen,  
Figure 3-1, in Chapter 3, “Visual User Interface,” of this guide if  
needed). Also, using :PTIMe:TCODe? query command will provide the  
FFOM value.  
D-4  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D Performance Tests  
Operational Verification  
Operational Verification  
Introduction  
The 58503B and 59551A GPS Receivers are designed to automatically  
detect and acquire satellites in order to begin providing precise  
frequency and time information.  
Until such acquisition is complete and the unit is locked with  
FFOM = 0, the signals produced on the rear panel are not precise.  
However, it is possible to verify that the Receiver has been received in  
good working condition by performing some simple operational  
verification tests upon receipt.  
Except for two tests (Time Stamp Verification and Programmable  
Pulse Verification), all of the following operational verification tests do  
not require usage of the GPS antenna. These tests are designed to  
provide a high degree of confidence that the Receiver is functioning,  
but the tests will not verify the specified performance characteristics.  
Such testing requires more expensive equipment and very long test  
times (over 72 hours per unit). We recommend that full or complete  
Performance Testing be restricted to testing only after any repairs to  
the 58503B or 59551A.  
The 58503B and 59551A require no calibration.  
Record the results of the Operational Verification in the  
appropriate place on the appropriate (i.e., 58503B or 59551A)  
Performance Test Record, which is located at the end of this  
chapter.  
Power-Up Procedure  
NOTE  
Use the HP 10100C 50feedthrough on the input of the oscilloscope  
for the following test.  
1 Connect the Receiver to a suitable power source. The unit will perform  
a self-test of internal components.  
2 Verify that after 15 seconds the Power indicator is on and the Alarm  
indicator is off. This ensures that all internal components and  
connections are functioning. (If needed, refer to the subsection titled  
“To Connect Power” in Chapter 1 of the 58503B/59551A Getting  
Started Guide for assistance in connecting the Receiver to a power  
source.)  
Operating and Programming Guide  
D-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D Performance Tests  
Operational Verification  
10 MHz Verification (58503B Only)  
1 Set the HP 54600B oscilloscope or equivalent sweep rate to 100 ns/div,  
input amplitude to 0.2 Volts/div, and input coupling to ac.  
2 Connect the oscilloscope to the rear-panel 10 MHz OUT output of the  
58503B as shown in Figure 2.  
HP 54600B  
Oscilloscope or equivalent  
58503B  
GPS Receiver  
(Rear Panel)  
!
ANT  
!
!
10 MHz  
50Feedthrough  
(HP 10100C)  
BNC Cable  
Figure D-1. 58503B 10 MHz Operational Verification Setup  
3 Verify that there is a 10 MHz sine wave present with approximately  
1 Volt peak-to-peak into the 50 ohm load.  
4 Mark Pass or Fail in Line 1 on the Operational Verification portion of  
the 58503B Performance Test Record, located at the end of this  
chapter.  
1 PPS Verification  
1 Set the oscilloscope sweep rate to 5 µs/div, input amplitude to 5 Volts,  
and input coupling to dc.  
2 Connect the oscilloscope to the rear-panel 1 PPS output of the Receiver  
as shown in Figure D-2.  
D-6  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D Performance Tests  
Operational Verification  
HP 54600B  
Oscilloscope or equivalent  
58503B  
GPS Receiver  
(Rear Panel)  
!
ANT  
!
!
1PPS  
50Feedthrough  
(HP 10100C)  
BNC Cable  
OR  
1PPS  
!
!
!
!
59551A  
GPS Receiver  
(Rear Panel)  
Figure D-2. 1 PPS Operational Verification Setup  
3 Verify the presence of a TTL level pulse with approximately 20 µs pulse  
width.  
4 Mark Pass or Fail in Line 2 on the Operational Verification portion of  
the appropriate ( 58503B or 59551A) Performance Test Record, located  
at the end of this chapter.  
IRIG-B Verification (59551A Only)  
1 Set the oscilloscope sweep rate to 1 msec/div and input amplitude to  
5 Volts/div, dc-coupled.  
2 Connect the oscilloscope to the rear-panel IRIG-B output of the 59551A  
GPS Receiver as shown in Figure 2.  
Verify that the display shows a sine wave with a period of 1 ms,  
changing in amplitude from 5 Volts peak-to-peak, to greater than  
10 Volts peak-to-peak. This is the IRIG-B time code modulating a  
1 kHz carrier.  
3 Mark Pass or Fail in Line 3 on the Operational Verification portion of  
the 59551A Performance Test Record, located at the end of this  
chapter.  
Operating and Programming Guide  
D-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D Performance Tests  
Operational Verification  
HP 54600B  
Oscilloscope or equivalent  
59551A  
GPS Receiver  
(Rear Panel)  
IRIG-B  
!
!
!
!
50Feedthrough  
(HP 10100C or equivalent)  
BNC Cable  
Figure D-3. 59551A IRIG-B Operational Verification Setup  
Time of Day and PORT 1 RS-232C Serial Interface  
Verification  
1 Connect a terminal or computer (set to 9600 baud, 8 data bits, 1 stop  
bit, and no parity and no pace) to the rear-panel PORT 1. If you need  
assistance in setting the serial parameters, refer to the Getting Started  
guide.  
2 Press the Return key on the terminal.  
Verify that either a SCPI > or E-xxx> prompt is returned. The xxx can  
be any number for this test. If E-xxx> is returned, send the *CLS  
command to clear the error.  
3 Type :SYSTEM:STATUS?, then press Enter (or Return) key.  
The terminal screen displays the Receiver Status screen, which is a  
complete status report of the Receiver. Without a GPS antenna, most  
data will be blank or indicating that the instrument is in “Power-Up”  
mode. The FFOM = 3 in the upper right corner indicates that the  
Receiver is in power-up mode and frequency outputs are invalid. At  
this point, the data at the bottom of the screen lists the results of all  
internal self-tests. The HEALTH MONITOR, SelfTest, Int Pwr,  
Oven Pwr, OCXO, EFC, and GPS Rcv should all show OK.  
4 From the terminal keyboard, type  
:PTIME:TCODE? and press Return.  
D-8  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D Performance Tests  
Operational Verification  
An alphanumeric string which starts with a “T” should be displayed as  
shown in the following example:  
T2199505112055233000049  
Note that the value above will be different for each test, depending on  
the local date and time.  
5 Mark Pass or Fail in Line 4 on the Operational Verification portion of  
the appropriate (58503B or 59551A) Performance Test Record, located  
at the end of this chapter.  
Antenna Power Verification  
1 Set the DMM to read a range of 5 Volts dc.  
2 Measure the dc voltage from the center pin of the antenna (Type N)  
connector with respect to the threaded connector shell.  
Verify that the voltage is between 4.5 and 5.0 Volts dc.  
3 Mark Pass or Fail in Line 5 on the Operational Verification portion of  
the appropriate (58503B or 59551A) Performance Test Record, located  
at the end of this chapter.  
4 If you are testing the 58503B with Option 001 Front Panel and  
Keypad, perform the procedure in the following section titled “Front  
Panel Display/Keypad Verification (58503B Option 001 Only)” on  
page D-10.  
If you are testing the standard 58503B, go to the section titled  
“Operational Verification Conclusion” on page D-15 in this chapter.  
If you are testing a 59551A, go to the section titled “Time Tagging  
(Stamping) Verification and Programmable Verification (59551A  
Only)” on page D-11.  
Operating and Programming Guide  
D-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D Performance Tests  
Operational Verification  
Front Panel Display/Keypad Verification (58503B  
Option 001 Only)  
This tests the operation of the Front Panel Display/Keypad option for  
the 58503B.  
1 Disconnect and re-apply power to the 58503B.  
2 While the letters "HP" are moving from right to left (about 2 seconds),  
press Sat key and then Time key to enter the TEST/DEMO mode.  
3 The words VFD DSP TEST will momentarily appear.  
The display should then show a test pattern that sequentially  
illuminates all 15 segments of all digits and punctuation marks in the  
display.  
4 Verify that all segments illuminate.  
5 When the segment illumination sequence is complete, the words  
DEMO MODE should then appear.  
6 Press each key one at a time. Each keypress should:  
• illuminate the LED corresponding to that key, and  
• display a simulated response to the function.  
NOTE  
(1) The Clear Alarm (Shift , Alt) function will exit the test. (2) The  
values displayed are not related to the 58503B under test. They are  
displayed for demonstration only.  
7 To exit the diagnostic, press Shift key, and then press Alt key.  
8 The 58503B power-up sequence should then continue. No further tests  
are necessary.  
9 Mark Pass or Fail in Line 5 on the Operational Verification portion of  
the 58503B Performance Test Record, located at the end of this  
chapter.  
10 Proceed to the section titled“Operational Verification Conclusion” on  
page D-15 to complete the operational verification.  
D-10  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D Performance Tests  
Operational Verification  
Time Tagging (Stamping) Verification and  
Programmable Verification (59551A Only)  
NOTE  
GPS ANTENNA REQUIRED. The steps below require that a GPS  
antenna be properly set up, and the 59551A is in GPS locked mode  
before proceeding. For information on how to make such a setup, refer  
to the antenna information provided on page D-4 in this chapter.  
If you determine that these tests will not be performed for your facility,  
please proceed to the next section titled “Operational Verification  
Conclusion” on page D-15.  
1 Connect a GPS Antenna and cable to the 59551A and allow the  
Receiver to indicate it is in “GPS Lock” mode as indicated by the  
illuminated GPS Lock indicator. Until GPS lock is attained, the  
following tests will not be valid. Your test setup should be similar to  
Figure 1.  
GPS  
Antenna  
Terminal or Computer  
!
!
!
!
59551A  
GPS Receiver  
(Rear Panel)  
Figure D-4. 59551A Time Tagging Operational Verification Setup  
2 Enter the following commands from the terminal or computer to note  
the current date and time.  
:PTIME:DATE?  
:PTIME:TIME?  
3 On the computer or terminal, type :SENSE:DATA:CLEAR and press the  
Return key.  
Operating and Programming Guide  
D-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D Performance Tests  
Operational Verification  
This clears the Time Tagging event registers of any data prior to the  
next step.  
4 On the computer or terminal, type :FORMAT:DATA ASCII and press the  
Return key.  
This sets the output format of the Time Tagging Data to an ASCII  
string for easier interpretation.  
5 Refer to Chapter 2, “Features and Functions,” in the 58503B/59951A  
Getting Started Guide to identify types of stimulus equipment that  
could be used for this test.  
A suggested general-purpose device could be a pulse generator, set to  
output a TTL level pulse.  
6 Use this signal to send an event to each of the three Time Tagging  
inputs.  
7 From the terminal or computer, send the following query commands to  
verify that an event was recorded in each of the Time Tagging event  
registers. Note that there is a space between the question mark (?) and  
the quotation mark (“) in the following commands.  
:SENSE:DATA? “TSTAMP 1”  
:SENSE:DATA? “TSTAMP 2”  
:SENSE:DATA? “TSTAMP 3”  
Note that the actual date and time of the record is not being tested.  
8 Verify that each response is the following format:  
yyyy,mm,dd,hh,mm,ssssssss,xxxxxxxxxx  
9 On the terminal, type :SENSE:DATA:CLEAR and press the Return key.  
10 This again clears the Time Tagging event registers of any data from  
this test.  
11 Mark Pass or Fail in Line 6 on the Operational Verification portion of  
the 59551A Performance Test Record, located at the end of this  
chapter.  
D-12  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D Performance Tests  
Operational Verification  
Programmable Pulse Verification (59551A Only)  
1 Enter the following commands from the terminal or computer:  
:PULSE:CONTINUOUS:PERIOD 1  
This sets the period to 1 second.  
:PULSE:CONTINUOUS:STATE ON  
This sets the programmable pulse output to provide a continuous  
stream of pulses.  
:PULSE:START:DATE <four-digit year>, <month>, <day>  
2 Set the year, month, and day to the same values read in step 2 in the  
previous procedure “Time Tagging Verification.”  
Example:  
:PULSE:START:DATE 1995, 7, 25 is July 25, 1995.  
:PULSE:START:TIME <hours>, <minutes>, <seconds>  
3 Set the hours, minutes, and seconds to the same values observed in  
step 2 of the previous procedure “Time Tagging Verification.”  
Example:  
:PULSE:START:TIME 13, 1, 5 is 13:01:05 in 24-hour format.  
NOTE  
Setting the time to a value earlier than the present time will start the  
pulse stream immediately. If a time is input with a value some time in  
the future, the pulse stream will not start until that time is attained.  
4 Set the oscilloscope sweep rate to 5 msec/div, input amplitude to  
5 Volts/div, and input coupling to dc.  
5 Connect the oscilloscope to the rear-panel Programmable Pulse output  
as shown in Figure 5.  
Operating and Programming Guide  
D-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D Performance Tests  
Operational Verification  
GPS  
Antenna  
HP 54600B  
Oscilloscope or equivalent  
Programmable Pulse  
!
!
!
!
50Feedthrough  
59551A  
GPS Receiver  
(HP 10100C)  
BNC Cable  
(Rear Panel)  
Terminal or Computer  
Figure D-5. 59551A Programmable Pulse Operational Verification  
Setup  
6 Verify that a continuous stream of TTL-compatible pulses are  
occurring at a 1 second rate.  
7 Mark Pass or Fail in Line 7 on the Operational Verification portion of  
the 59551A Performance Test Record, located at the end of this  
chapter.  
D-14  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D Performance Tests  
Operational Verification  
Operational Verification Conclusion  
NOTE  
Perform the following step only if you wish to restore memory of the  
58503B or 59551A Receiver to the factory default states. Doing this can  
change several parameters that have been stored by a previous user. If  
you have any questions or concerns, refer to Table 5-2 under the  
description of the :SYSTEM:PRESET command on page 5-111 of  
Chapter 5 in this guide for information on the type of information that  
is stored.  
On the terminal or computer, type:  
:SYSTEM:PRESET and press the Return key.  
This will ensure that your Receiver has been restored to the factory  
defaults as originally received.  
This completes the operational verification.  
Operating and Programming Guide  
D-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D Performance Tests  
In Case of Difficulty  
In Case of Difficulty  
If any of the above tests fail it should be re-checked before assuming  
that the unit is defective. Return any defective unit.  
D-16  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D Performance Tests  
Complete Performance Tests  
Complete Performance Tests  
The specifications of the 58503B and 59551A can be verified by  
performing the Performance Tests provided in this section. Table D-2  
lists a summary of the 58503B/59551A Complete Performance Tests.  
Table D-2. The 58503B/59551A Complete Performance Tests  
Page  
Time and Frequency Output Tests  
Number  
D-18  
D-19  
Preliminary Test Setup  
Test 1: 10 MHz Frequency Accuracy and 1 PPS Jitter  
(Locked to GPS)  
D-22  
Test 2: 10 MHz Holdover Aging and 1 PPS Accumulated  
Time Error (Unlocked)  
D-24  
D-24  
Test 3: 1 PPS Time Accuracy (Locked)  
Test 4: 10 MHz Frequency Stability (Time Domain) and  
Phase Noise (Frequency Domain) Measurements  
The following tests will ensure that the 58503B GPS Time and  
Frequency Reference Receiver and 59551A GPS Measurements  
Synchronization Module are meeting the published specifications.  
Some of these tests will require that the Receiver be operating  
continuously for at least 3 days, others require that the Receiver be  
disconnected from GPS, and others will require further investigation in  
order to produce a satisfactory setup and measurement.  
The critical specifications to be tested are the 10 MHz Frequency  
Accuracy (1 day) and the 1 PPS Jitter (1 day) specifications. As long as  
the Receiver is locked, the proper performance of these two  
specifications will imply that the other specifications are in  
conformance.  
The following tests do not test “typical” or “nominal” specifications, or  
“supplemental characteristics,” “supplemental information,” or  
“features.”  
Record the results of the Performance Test in the appropriate  
place on the appropriate (i.e., 58503B or 59551A) Performance  
Test Record, which is located at the end of this chapter.  
Operating and Programming Guide  
D-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D Performance Tests  
Complete Performance Tests  
Preliminary Test Setup  
If you have not connected the GPS antenna to the Receiver, perform  
the following preliminary procedure in this section.  
If you have already connected the GPS antenna to the Receiver, go to  
the next subsection titled “Test 1: 10 MHz Frequency Accuracy and  
1 PPS Jitter (Locked to GPS).”  
1 Connect the antenna system to the rear-panel ANTENNA Type-N  
connector of the Receiver as described in the instructions given in the  
section titled “Preparing the GPS Receiver for Use” in Chapter 1, of the  
58503B/59551A Getting Started Guide.  
NOTE  
Do not apply power to the Receiver unless a fully operational antenna  
system is connected to the ANTENNA input connector. Power applied  
with no antenna input or a non-functioning antenna will initiate an  
extended search process that may increase time to reach GPS lock. You  
can halt the extended search by disconnecting and reconnecting  
(cycling) the external supply voltage to the Receiver (you may need to  
leave power disconnected for greater than five seconds).  
2 Connect the Receiver to a suitable power source. (If needed, refer to the  
subsection titled “To Connect Power” in Chapter 1 of the  
58503B/59551A Getting Started Guide.)  
3 The Receiver will perform a self-test of internal components. Verify  
that after 15 seconds the Power indicator illuminates and the Alarm  
indicator is off. This ensures that all internal components and  
connections are functioning.  
D-18  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D Performance Tests  
Complete Performance Tests  
Test 1: 10 MHz Frequency Accuracy and 1 PPS Jitter  
(Locked to GPS)  
This test measures the relative change in the 1 PPS pulses between  
the unit under test and a known accurate source. A time interval is  
measured and the data is stored to be compared with a second  
measurement, 24 hours later. The 1 PPS source is derived from the  
internal 10 MHz, and the relative accuracy of 1 PPS is directly related  
to the accuracy of the 10 MHz.  
Specifications Tested  
-12  
Frequency Accuracy (locked): Better than 1 x 10 for a one day  
average, 0 degrees to 50 degrees C.  
1 PPS Jitter of leading edge: <750 ps with at least one satellite in  
view, Selective Availability on.  
Procedure  
1 Connect the terminal or computer to the Receiver using the cable  
recommended in the Getting Started Guide and ensure that they are  
both communicating.  
2 Ensure that the Receiver is in “GPS Lock” mode as indicated by the  
illuminated GPS Lock indicator, and that FFOM = 0. The current  
value of FFOM and many other characteristics of the unit can be  
determined by typing :SYSTEM:STATUS? on the terminal.  
3 Connect the 10 MHz reference output from the reference 1 PPS source  
(HP 5071A or another stable, traceable house standard) to the  
rear-panel Ref In of the Universal Counter, as shown in Figure D-6, to  
provide an external timebase for the Counter.  
GPS  
Antenna  
Ref. In (rear panel)  
50Feedthrough (HP 10100C)  
Port1  
58503B or  
59551A  
10 MHz External  
HP 53132A  
Reference Out  
(rear panel)  
1PPS  
(rear panel)  
Universal  
Counter  
GPS Receiver  
(Rear Panel)  
or equivalent  
!
ANT  
!
!
1PPS  
Output  
Channel 1  
Channel 2  
HP 5071A  
Primary Frequency Standard or  
House Standard  
Figure D-6. 10 MHz Frequency Accuracy and 1 PPS Jitter Test Setup  
(58503B GPS Receiver shown)  
Operating and Programming Guide  
D-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D Performance Tests  
Complete Performance Tests  
4 Connect the rear-panel 1 PPS from Receiver under test to Channel 1 of  
the Universal Counter.  
5 Connect the 1 PPS from the reference standard (5071A) to Channel 2.  
6 On the terminal or computer, enter the following command to clear all  
entries in the Diagnostic (status) Log:  
:DIAG:LOG:CLEAR and press the Enter (or Return) key.  
7 Set the Universal Counter function to take 100 samples of Time  
Interval and compute the Mean value. Ensure that the inputs are set  
to DC-coupled, 50 Ohms, and rising edge. Set the trigger level for both  
inputs to 1Volt dc.  
8 Record the average time interval for later comparison.  
_______________________________________ seconds.  
9 Disconnect the reference 1 PPS from input 2 and set the counter to  
“COMMON” mode so the 1 PPS from the Receiver is input to both  
channels. For this step, be sure the trigger levels are both set to 1 Volt  
dc.  
10 Set the counter to compute the Standard Deviation for the same 100  
samples.  
This is the RMS Jitter of the 1 PPS.  
D-20  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D Performance Tests  
Complete Performance Tests  
11 Again, allow the counter to accumulate 100 samples of time interval.  
12 Note the largest deviation (greater or less) from exactly 1 second.  
This the worst-case 1 PPS leading edge jitter.  
13 Record the results of 1 PPS Jitter on Line 2 of Test 1 of the  
Performance Test Record.  
14 Wait 24 hours to complete the Frequency Accuracy test.  
15 On the terminal or computer, enter the following command:  
:DIAG:LOG:READ:ALL? and press the Enter (or Return) key.  
Observe the messages (if any) that appear and verify that none of the  
messages indicate that the 58503B/59551A has entered holdover mode.  
If it has, the entire test must be re-started from step 2 above.  
16 Repeat steps 2 through 8 above after the 24-hour period.  
17 Compute the Frequency Accuracy using the following formula:  
(t1 t2)seconds  
---------------------------------------------= Accuracy (unitless)  
tseconds  
Where,  
t1 is the average time interval first measured  
t2 is the average time interval last measured  
t is the time between measurements (86,400 seconds = 24 hours)  
18 Record the results of Frequency Accuracy in Line 1 of Test 1 of the  
Performance Test Record.  
Operating and Programming Guide  
D-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D Performance Tests  
Complete Performance Tests  
Test 2: 10 MHz Holdover Aging and 1 PPS  
Accumulated Time Error (Unlocked)  
The following tests are identical to the previous tests, with the  
exception that during the actual test, the Receiver is not locked to the  
GPS. However, the test must adhere to the restrictions noted below  
with the specification in order for the results to be valid.  
Specifications Tested  
-10  
Holdover aging: < 1 x 10 /day average frequency change in 24 hours  
unlocked after 3 days locked operation for any 10 degrees C range  
between 10 degrees C and 40 degrees C.  
Accumulated time error: <8.6 us accumulated in 24 hours unlocked  
after 3 days of locked operation with a fixed antenna location, any  
10 degrees C range between 10 degrees and 40 degrees C.  
Procedure  
1 Ensure that the Receiver has been in GPS Lock mode for at least three  
(3) days without entering holdover mode by typing the following  
command on the terminal or computer:  
:DIAG:LOG:READ:ALL? and press the Enter (or Return) key.  
Verify that there are no messages to indicate that holdover mode was  
started during the last 72 hours of operation.  
2 Ensure that the temperature restrictions described above will be met  
for the next 24 hours.  
3 Connect the 10 MHz reference output from the reference 1 PPS source  
(5071A or another stable, traceable house standard) to the rear-panel  
Ref In of the Universal Counter, as shown in Figure D-6, to provide an  
external timebase for the Counter.  
4 Connect the rear-panel 1 PPS from Receiver under test to Channel 1 of  
the Universal Counter.  
5 Connect the 1 PPS from the reference standard (5071A) to Channel 2.  
Ensure that the inputs are set to DC-coupled, 50 Ohms, and rising  
edge. Set the trigger level for both inputs to 1 Volt dc.  
6 Disconnect the antenna cable (N-type connector) at the rear of the  
Receiver to force it into Holdover Mode.  
7 Ensure that the Holdover indicator is illuminated and the GPS Lock is  
not illuminated.  
D-22  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D Performance Tests  
Complete Performance Tests  
8 Note the time interval average for 100 samples, either positive or  
negative.  
NOTE  
Do not re-connect the antenna at this time. It must remain  
disconnected for the entire 24-hour period.  
9 Wait 24 hours to complete the Holdover Aging test. During this  
24-hour period, ensure that the temperature restrictions are  
maintained. If the temperature does exceed the range, the Receiver  
will have to be re-connected to the antenna, allowed to lock, run for at  
least 3 days, and re-tested with this procedure.  
10 Repeat steps 3, 4, 5, and 8 above after the 24 hour period.  
11 If desired, re-connect the antenna cable at this time.  
12 Compute the Holdover Aging rate using the following formula:  
(t1 t2)seconds  
---------------------------------------------= Aging rate (unitless)  
tseconds  
Where,  
t1 is the average time interval first measured  
t2 is theaverage time interval last measured  
t is the time between measurements (86,400 seconds = 24 hours)  
13 Compute the Accumulated Time Error using the following formula:  
(t1 - t2) seconds = Error (seconds)  
Where t1 and t2 are defined as in the previous step.  
14 Record the results of Holdover Aging and 1 PPS Accumulated Time  
Error in the Test 2 row of the Performance Test Record.  
Operating and Programming Guide  
D-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D Performance Tests  
Complete Performance Tests  
Test 3: 1 PPS Time Accuracy (Locked)  
This specification is a statistical probability that the Receiver will  
conform to the standard as described. This cannot be tested with any  
degree of confidence except at NIST or an equivalent National  
Standards Laboratory. Actual accuracy obtained depends on the exact  
knowledge of the geophysical location, characteristics and delay in the  
antenna, calibration of all measurement delays, and calibration of  
antenna cable delay. Calibration of both ionospheric and tropospheric  
delay use the standard algorithms provided in the GPS data messages.  
At the 95% confidence level, time errors associated with the Receiver,  
GPS system, and ionospheric and tropospheric effects will be less than  
110 ns.  
Test 4: 10 MHz Frequency Stability (Time Domain)  
and Phase Noise (Frequency Domain) Measurements  
NOTE  
High accuracy precision measurements of both time and frequency  
domain stability are available through the National Institute of  
Standards and Technology (NIST) in the USA, and at other equivalent  
National Standards Laboratories. NIST can completely characterize  
and verify all major specifications of the 58503B or 59551A. For  
information regarding the various tests available, contact:  
National Institute of Standards and Technology,  
Measurements Services Office  
325 Broadway, Boulder CO 80303-3328 USA,  
Telephone: (303) 497-3753  
Frequency Stability (Time Domain)  
This is an engineering-level measurement requiring a special test  
setup. The test setup must be carefully designed to eliminate all  
sources of noise. For more information on how to make this  
measurement, see Application Note 358-12. Also, see NIST Technical  
Note 1337 (available from US Government Printing Office,  
Washington DC., USA). This is an excellent theoretical as well as  
technical reference for this measurement.  
Phase Noise (Frequency Domain)  
This measurement requires the HP 3048A Phase Noise Measurement  
System or equivalent, a highly specialized test system. In order to  
perform properly, this system must contain a reference oscillator with  
phase noise characteristics that are equal to or better than the 58503B  
or 59551A.  
This completes the performance tests.  
D-24  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D Performance Tests  
Complete Performance Tests  
Operating and Programming Guide  
D-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D Performance Tests  
58503B Performance Test Record  
58503B Performance Test Record  
Model 58503B GPS Time and Frequency Reference Receiver  
Serial Number: __________________________ Repair/Work Order No. _______________________  
Test Performed By:_______________________ Temperature: ________________________________  
Date: ___________________________________ Relative Humidity: ___________________________  
Notes: ________________________________________________________________________________  
Line Number  
Operational Verification  
Test Results  
Pass Fail  
1
2
3
4
5
10 MHz Verification  
____  
____  
____  
____  
____  
____  
____  
____  
____  
____  
1 PPS Verification  
Time of Day RS-232 Serial Interface Verification  
Antenna Power Verification  
Front Panel Display/Keypad Verification  
(Option 001 Only)  
58503B Complete Performance Tests  
Test Number Test Description  
Results  
Limits  
Better than 1 x 10  
12  
1
10 MHz Frequency Accuracy  
1. ______________  
for a  
one day average, 0° to  
50° C.  
and  
1 PPS Jitter (Locked to GPS)  
2. _____________  
<750 ps with at least one  
satellite in view, Selective  
Availability on.  
10  
2
10 MHz Holdover Aging  
and  
1. ______________  
2. _____________  
<1 x 10 /day average  
frequency change in  
24 hours unlocked after  
3 days locked operation  
for any 10° C range  
1 PPS Accumulated Time error  
(Unlocked)  
between 10° C and 40° C.  
<8.6 us accumulated in  
24 hours unlocked after  
3 days of locked operation  
with a fixed antenna  
location, any 10° C range  
between 10° C and 40° C.  
3
4
1 PPS Time Accuracy (Locked)  
_____________  
_____________  
10 MHz Frequency Stability  
(Time Domain) and Phase Noise  
(Frequency Domain)  
Measurement  
D-26  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D Performance Tests  
59551A Performance Test Record  
59551A Performance Test Record  
Model 59551A GPS Measurements Synchronization Module  
Serial Number: __________________________ Repair/Work Order No. _______________________  
Test Performed By:_______________________ Temperature: ________________________________  
Date: ___________________________________ Relative Humidity: ___________________________  
Notes: ________________________________________________________________________________  
Line Number  
Operational Verification  
Test Results  
Pass Fail  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
10 MHz Verification  
____  
____  
____  
____  
____  
____  
____  
____  
____  
____  
____  
____  
____  
____  
1 PPS Verification  
IRIG-B Verification  
Time of Day RS-232 Serial Interface Verification  
Antenna Power Verification  
Time Tagging (Stamping) Verification  
Programmable Pulse Verification  
59551A Complete Performance Tests  
Test Number Test Description  
Results  
Limits  
Better than 1 x 10  
12  
1
10 MHz Frequency Accuracy  
1. ______________  
for a  
one day average, 0° to  
50° C.  
and  
1 PPS Jitter (Locked to GPS)  
2. _____________  
<750 ps with at least one  
satellite in view, Selective  
Availability on.  
10  
2
10 MHz Holdover Aging  
and  
1. ______________  
2. _____________  
<1 x 10 /day average  
frequency change in  
24 hours unlocked after  
3 days locked operation  
for any 10° C range  
1 PPS Accumulated Time error  
(Unlocked)  
between 10° C and 40° C.  
<8.6 us accumulated in  
24 hours unlocked after  
3 days of locked operation  
with a fixed antenna  
location, any 10° C range  
between 10° C and 40° C.  
3
4
1 PPS Time Accuracy (Locked)  
_____________  
_____________  
10 MHz Frequency Stability  
(Time Domain) and Phase Noise  
(Frequency Domain)  
Measurement  
Operating and Programming Guide  
D-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D Performance Tests  
59551A Performance Test Record  
D-28  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E
58503B Specifications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix E 58503B Specifications  
Specifications and Characteristics  
Specifications and Characteristics  
The specifications and characteristics of the 58503B GPS Time and  
Frequency Reference Receiver are provided in this chapter.  
GPS Receiver Features  
Eight-channel, parallel tracking GPS engine  
C/A Code, L1 Carrier  
SmartClock™ technology  
Enhanced GPS technology  
E-2  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix E 58503B Specifications  
Specifications and Characteristics  
Note 2  
10 MHz Output  
Specifications  
Locked:  
Additional Features  
When a quartz crystal oscillator has not  
been operated for a period of time, or if it  
has been subjected to severe thermal or  
mechanical shock, as might be  
Alarm Output: TTL open collector  
with internal pull-up resistor.  
Circuit can sink up to 10 ma.  
Provides a logic output to allow  
monitoring of normal (H) and  
abnormal (L) operation  
Frequency Accuracy: Better than  
1 × 1012, for a one-day average,  
0° C to 50° C.  
encountered during product shipment, the  
oscillator may take some time to stabilize.  
In most cases, the oscillator will drift and  
then stabilize at or below its specified rate  
within a few days after being turned on.  
In isolated cases, depending upon the  
amount of time the oscillator has been off  
and the environmental conditions it has  
experienced, the oscillator may take up to  
one week to reach its specified aging rate  
and to operate without significant  
externally and remotely.  
BNC connector.  
Unlocked:  
Holdover aging:  
<1 × 1010 per day average  
frequency change in 24 hours of  
unlocked operation. (See Note 1.)  
Front Panel Indicators (LEDs):  
Power  
GPS Lock  
Holdover Mode  
Alarm  
Phase Noise: (Locked)  
frequency “jumps.”  
Offset From  
Signal (Hz)  
1
SSB Phase  
Noise (dBc)  
85  
Remote Interface:  
When a GPS Receiver is initially turned  
on and locked to the GPS satellite  
system, it will achieve GPS lock within  
30 minutes of operation. It has a 95%  
probability of meeting unlocked (holdover)  
specifications after 24 hours of warmup,  
followed by GPS lock for 48 hours. The  
longer GPS Receiver (and its quartz  
oscillator) operates, the better its stability  
and unlocked (holdover) performance  
becomes.  
RS-232-C DTE configuration:  
Complete remote control and  
interrogation of all instrument  
functions and parameters.  
10  
125  
100  
1000  
10000  
135  
140  
145  
Factory defaults: baud rate 9600,  
8 data bits, 1 start bit, 1 stop bit,  
no parity. Other settings are  
programmable.  
Time Domain Stability: (Locked)  
(See graph on next page.)  
Averaging  
Root Allan  
Time Seconds Variance  
Connector: 25-pin female  
rectangular D subminiature on  
rear panel.  
1.5 × 1010  
1.5 × 1011  
5 × 1012  
5 × 1012  
5 × 1011  
5 × 1011  
1 PPS Output  
0.01  
0.1  
1
10  
100  
1000  
Specifications  
Time code output is available to a  
computer immediately preceding  
the 1 PPS signal for the current  
second.  
Locked:  
Jitter of leading edge: <750 ps  
rms with at least one satellite in  
view, SA on.  
Supplemental Information  
Time Accuracy:  
Environmental  
Specifications  
• Waveform: Sine wave  
• Amplitude: >1 volt p-p into a  
50load  
• Harmonic Distortion:  
<25 dBc (Typical)  
• Non-harmonic signals:  
<60 dBc (Typical)  
• Source impedance:  
50(nominal)  
<110 ns with respect to UTC  
(USNO MC)—95% probability  
when unit is properly installed,  
calibrated, and locked to GPS.  
Time and Frequency Reference  
Receiver (58503B)  
Unlocked:  
Operating: 0° C to +50° C  
Storage: 40° C to +80° C  
Accumulated time error: <8.6 µs  
accumulated in 24 hours of  
unlocked operation. (See Note 1.)  
Antenna (58532A)  
Operating: 30° C to +80° C  
Storage: 40° C to +85° C  
• Coupling: ac  
• Connector: BNC  
Supplemental Information  
• Pulse Width: 26 µsec  
• Amplitude: >2.4 volts into  
50load. (TTL compatible)  
• Connector: BNC  
Note 1  
This specification has a 95% probability,  
and is based on the availability of four or  
more GPS satellites during three days of  
locked operation with a fixed antenna  
location. The temperature must remain  
within a 10° C range between 10° C and  
40° C.  
• Rise time: <25 ns  
Operating and Programming Guide  
E-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix E 58503B Specifications  
Specifications and Characteristics  
Power Requirements  
AC Power (standard):  
90 to 132 Vac or 198 to 264 Vac,  
automatically selected;  
50 to 60 Hz.  
Option AWQ:  
Unit accepts:  
+24 Vdc or + 48 Vdc nominal.  
Actual operating range:  
+19 to +60 Vdc operating range.  
Greater than  
+23 Vdc required to start.  
Input Power (all options):  
<35 watts (nominal).  
Weight and Size  
10 MHz Root Allan Variance  
Dimensions:  
88.5 mm H ×  
212.6 mm W × 348.3 mm D.  
Half-Rack Module  
Weight: 3.6 kg (8 lbs).  
E-4  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix E 58503B Specifications  
Specifications and Characteristics  
Other Information  
The standard 58503B does not include a display or a keypad. While not  
necessary, it may be convenient to track the Receiver’s progress during  
installation and startup by monitoring the satellites being tracked,  
location (position), time and other parameters. The 58503B, however,  
is supplied with a small Windows 3.1 program named SatStat (59551-  
13401), which can serve to display important parameters. SatStat  
operates on any PC that can run Windows 3.1, and that has an  
available serial interface.  
SatStat provides several useful functions. It continuously polls the  
RS-232C interface and displays Receiver information most likely to be  
of interest. This includes satellites being tracked along with their  
elevation and azimuth, SmartClock State (locked, holdover, etc.),  
antenna coordinates, time and frequency figures of merit and other  
data. In addition, a clock window is provided to display time of day in  
real time. Finally, SatStat allows you to easily change many receiver  
parameters, such as antenna delay, by simply picking the item from a  
pop-up menu and entering a new value. With SatStat and a PC,  
you can monitor and control many aspects of the Receiver status  
without developing software.  
Achieving accurate time of day requires care in determining cable  
delays, Receiver bias, position (Lat, Lon, Alt), atmospheric conditions  
and other parameters which are dependent on each individual  
installation.  
Options and Accessories  
Available options and accessories include an antenna, an antenna  
environmental cover and ground plane, pre-configured cables,  
a lightning arrester, an antenna line amplifier, a built-in display and  
dc power.  
Operating and Programming Guide  
E-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix E 58503B Specifications  
Specifications and Characteristics  
This page intentionally left blank.  
E-6  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F
59551A Specifications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix F 59551A Specifications  
Specifications and Characteristics  
Specifications and Characteristics  
The specifications and characteristics of the 59551A GPS  
Measurements Synchronization Module are provided in this chapter.  
GPS Receiver Features  
Eight-channel, parallel tracking GPS engine  
C/A Code, L1 Carrier  
SmartClock™ technology  
Enhanced GPS technology  
Operating and Programming Guide  
F-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix F 59551A Specifications  
Specifications and Characteristics  
amount of time the oscillator has been off  
and the environmental conditions it has  
experienced, the oscillator may take up to  
one week to reach its specified aging rate  
and to operate without significant  
Remote Interface:  
(Two RS-232C Ports)  
1 PPS Output  
Specifications  
Locked:  
RS-232-C DTE configuration:  
PRIMARY PORT  
Complete remote control and  
interrogation of all instrument  
functions and parameters.  
SECONDARY PORT  
Interrogation of all instrument  
functions and parameters.  
Factory defaults: baud rate 9600—  
8 data bits, 1 start bit, 1 stop bit,  
no parity. Other settings are  
programmable.  
Connectors: 9-pin female  
rectangular D subminiature  
(DB-9) on front panel, 25-pin  
female rectangular D  
Jitter of leading edge: <750 ps  
rms with at least one satellite in  
view.  
frequency “jumps.”  
When a GPS Receiver is initially turned  
on and locked to the GPS satellite  
system, it will achieve GPS lock within  
30 minutes of operation. It has a 95%  
probability of meeting unlocked (holdover)  
specifications after 24 hours of warmup,  
followed by GPS lock for 48 hours. The  
longer GPS Receiver (and its quartz  
oscillator) operates, the better its stability  
and unlocked (holdover) performance  
becomes.  
Time Accuracy:  
<110 ns with respect to UTC  
(USNO MC)—95% probability  
when unit is properly installed,  
calibrated, and locked to GPS.  
Unlocked:  
Accumulated time error: <8.6 µs  
accumulated in 24 hours of  
unlocked operation. (See Note 1.)  
Three Time-tag Inputs  
Supplemental Information  
Received signal: TTL, 50.  
Time-tag accuracy: same as the  
accuracy of the 59551A.  
Quantization: 100 ns  
Input Interface: BNC  
Minimum Pos/Neg pulse width:  
200 ns  
subminiature (DB-25) on rear  
panel.  
Time code output is available to a  
computer immediately preceding  
the 1 PPS signal for the current  
second.  
• Pulse Width: 26 µsec  
• Amplitude: >2.4 volts into  
50load. (TTL compatible)  
• Connector: BNC  
• Rise time: <5 ns  
Three time-tag buffers: 256 events  
each, retrievable via RS-232C.  
Minimum time between events:  
1 ms  
Maximum stamp rate:  
1 measurement per ms  
Additional Features  
Alarm BITE Output:  
Basic unit output: solid state relay  
(normally open); closed contact  
indicates system fault or loss of  
satellite lock. Contact rating  
200 Vdc @ 0.5 amps.  
Timer/Clock Output  
Programmable Pulse Output:  
Single pulse at the time  
Connector: Twin BNC  
IRIG-B123 Output Port  
BNC connector  
programmed via RS-232C port,  
or repetitive output pulse at a  
programmable repetition period  
from 1 second to 1 year.  
Note 1  
Quantization: 100 ns  
This specification has a 95% probability,  
and is based on availability of four or more  
GPS satellites during three days locked  
operation with a fixed antenna location.  
The temperature must remain within a  
10° C range between 10° C and 40° C.  
Accuracy: same as the time  
accuracy of the 59551A.  
Front Panel Indicators (LEDs):  
Power  
GPS Lock  
Holdover Mode  
Alarm  
Note 2  
When a quartz crystal oscillator has not  
been operated for a period of time, or if it  
has been subjected to severe thermal or  
mechanical shock, as might be  
encountered during product shipment, the  
oscillator may take some time to stabilize.  
In most cases, the oscillator will drift and  
then stabilize at or below its specified rate  
within a few days after being turned on.  
In isolated cases, depending upon the  
Operating and Programming Guide  
F-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix F 59551A Specifications  
Specifications and Characteristics  
Environmental Specifications  
Measurements Synchronization Module (59551A)  
Operating: 0° C to +50° C  
Storage: 40° C to +80° C  
Antenna (58532A)  
Operating: 40° C to +80° C  
Storage: 40° C to +85° C  
Power Requirements  
AC Power:  
90 to 132 Vac or 198 to 264 Vac, automatically selected;  
50 to 60 Hz.  
or  
DC Power:  
129 Vdc nominal (115 to 140 Vdc operating range).  
Input Power (all options):  
<35 watts (nominal).  
Weight and Size  
Dimensions:  
88.5 mm H × 212.6 mm W × 348.3 mm D. Half-Rack Module  
Weight: 3.6 kg (8 lbs).  
Surge Withstand:  
Meets IEEE/ANSI C37.90, C37.90.1  
Operating and Programming Guide  
F-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix F 59551A Specifications  
Specifications and Characteristics  
Other Information  
The standard 59551A does not include a display or a keypad. While not  
necessary, it may be convenient to track the Receiver’s progress during  
installation and startup by monitoring the satellites being tracked,  
location (position), time and other parameters. The 59551A, however,  
is supplied with a small Windows 3.1 program named SatStat (59551-  
13401), which can serve to display important parameters. SatStat  
operates on any PC that can run Windows 3.1, and that has an  
available serial interface.  
SatStat provides several useful functions. It continuously polls the  
RS-232C interface and displays Receiver information most likely to be  
of interest. This includes satellites being tracked along with their  
elevation and azimuth, SmartClock State (locked, holdover, etc.),  
antenna coordinates, time and frequency figures of merit and other  
data. In addition, a clock window is provided to display time of day in  
real time. Finally, SatStat allows you to easily change many receiver  
parameters, such as antenna delay, by simply picking the item from a  
pop-up menu and entering a new value. With SatStat and a PC,  
you can monitor and control many aspects of the Receiver status  
without developing software.  
Achieving accurate time of day requires care in determining cable  
delays, Receiver bias, position (Lat, Lon, Alt), atmospheric conditions  
and other parameters which are dependent on each individual  
installation.  
Options and Accessories  
Available options and accessories include an antenna, an antenna  
environmental cover and ground plane, pre-configured cables,  
a lightning arrester, an antenna line amplifier, a built-in display and  
ac power.  
F-5  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix F 59551A Specifications  
Specifications and Characteristics  
This page intentionally left blank.  
Operating and Programming Guide  
F-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Index  
*CLS, 5-54, 5-115  
*ESE, 5-66  
*ESE?, 5-67  
*ESR?, 5-67  
*IDN?, 5-114  
*SRE, 5-57  
*SRE?, 5-57  
*STB?, 5-58  
*TST?, 5-70  
:DIAGnostic:DOWNload, 5-115  
:DIAGnostic:ERASe, 5-115  
:DIAGnostic:ERASe?, 5-116  
:DIAGnostic:LIFetime:COUNt?, 5-71  
:DIAGnostic:LOG:CLEar, 5-45  
:DIAGnostic:LOG:CLEar <current log size>, 5-45  
:DIAGnostic:LOG:COUNt?, 5-46  
:DIAGnostic:LOG:READ:ALL?, 5-45  
:DIAGnostic:LOG:READ?, 5-46  
:DIAGnostic:LOG:READ? <entry number>, 5-47  
:DIAGnostic:QUERy:RESPonse?, 5-108  
:DIAGnostic:ROSCillator:EFControl:RELative?, 5-28  
:DIAGnostic:TEST:RESult?, 5-72  
:DIAGnostic:TEST?, 5-71  
:FORMat:DATA, 5-93  
:FORMat:DATA?, 5-93  
:GPS:INITial:DATE, 5-9  
:GPS:INITial:POSition, 5-10  
:GPS:INITial:TIME, 5-11  
:GPS:POSition, 5-12  
:GPS:POSition:ACTual?, 5-14  
:GPS:POSition:HOLD:LAST?, 5-14  
:GPS:POSition:HOLD:STATe?, 5-15  
:GPS:POSition:SURVey:PROGress?, 5-15  
:GPS:POSition:SURVey:STATe, 5-15  
:GPS:POSition:SURVey:STATe:POWerup, 5-16  
:GPS:POSition:SURVey:STATe:POWerup?, 5-16  
:GPS:POSition:SURVey:STATe?, 5-16  
:GPS:POSition?, 5-13  
:GPS:REFerence:ADELay, 5-22  
:GPS:REFerence:ADELay?, 5-23  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Command Index-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Index  
:GPS:REFerence:VALid?, 5-24  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:COUNt?, 5-25  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:EMANgle, 5-17  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:EMANgle?, 5-17  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:IGNore, 5-18  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:IGNore:ALL, 5-18  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:IGNore:COUNt?, 5-20  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:IGNore:NONE, 5-18  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:IGNore:STATe?, 5-21  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:IGNore?, 5-18  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:INCLude, 5-19  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:INCLude:ALL, 5-19  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:INClude:COUNt?, 5-20  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:INCLude:NONE, 5-19  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:INClude:STATe?, 5-21  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:INCLude?, 5-19  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking?, 5-24  
:GPS:SATellite:VISible:PREDicted:COUNt?, 5-26  
:GPS:SATellite:VISible:PREDicted?, 5-25  
:LED:ALARm?, 5-56  
:LED:GPSLock?, 5-29  
:LED:HOLDover?, 5-29  
:PTIMe:DATE?, 5-75  
:PTIMe:LEAPsecond:ACCumulated?, 5-79  
:PTIMe:LEAPsecond:DATE?, 5-80  
:PTIMe:LEAPsecond:DURation?, 5-81  
:PTIMe:LEAPsecond:STATe?, 5-82  
:PTIMe:PPS:EDGE, 5-78  
:PTIMe:PPS:EDGE?, 5-78  
:PTIMe:TIME:STRing?, 5-76  
:PTIMe:TIME?, 5-75  
:PTIMe:TZONe, 5-77  
:PTIMe:TZONe?, 5-77  
:PULSe:CONTinuous:PERiod, 5-84  
:PULSe:CONTinuous:PERiod?, 5-84  
:PULSe:CONTinuous:STATe, 5-85  
:PULSe:CONTinuous:STATe?, 5-85  
:PULSe:REFerence:EDGE, 5-86  
:PULSe:REFerence:EDGE?, 5-86  
:PULSe:STARt:DATE, 5-87  
:PULSe:STARt:DATE?, 5-87  
:PULSe:STARt:TIME, 5-88  
:PULSe:STARt:TIME?, 5-88  
Command Index-2  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Index  
:SENSe:DATA:CLEar, 5-90  
:SENSe:DATA:CLEar <data set>, 5-91  
:SENSe:DATA:MEMory:OVERflow:COUNt?, 5-97  
:SENSe:DATA:MEMory:OVERflow:COUNt? <data set>, 5-98  
:SENSe:DATA:MEMory:SAVE, 5-98  
:SENSe:DATA:MEMory:SAVE?, 5-99  
:SENSe:DATA:POINts?, 5-94  
:SENSe:DATA:POINts? <data set>, 5-94  
:SENSe:DATA:TSTamp?, 5-95  
:SENSe:DATA?, 5-92  
:SENSe:TSTamp <channel>:EDGE, 5-90  
:SENSe:TSTamp <channel>:EDGE?, 5-90  
:STATus:<register>:CONDition?, 5-60  
:STATus:<register>:ENABle, 5-62  
:STATus:<register>:ENABle?, 5-63  
:STATus:<register>:EVENt?, 5-61  
:STATus:<register>:NTRansition, 5-64  
:STATus:<register>:NTRansition?, 5-65  
:STATus:<register>:PTRansition, 5-64  
:STATus:<register>:PTRansition?, 5-65  
:STATus:PRESet:ALARm, 5-55  
:STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition:USER, 5-68  
:STATus:QUEStionable:EVENt:USER, 5-69  
:SYNChronization:FFOMerit?, 5-30  
:SYNChronization:HOLDover:DURation:THReshold, 5-34  
:SYNChronization:HOLDover:DURation:THReshold:EXCeeded?, 5-35  
:SYNChronization:HOLDover:DURation:THReshold?, 5-34  
:SYNChronization:HOLDover:DURation?, 5-33  
:SYNChronization:HOLDover:INITiate, 5-36  
:SYNChronization:HOLDover:RECovery:INITiate, 5-37  
:SYNChronization:HOLDover:RECovery:LIMit:IGNore, 5-38  
:SYNChronization:HOLDover:TUNCertainty:PREDicted?, 5-31  
:SYNChronization:HOLDover:TUNCertainty:PRESent?, 5-31  
:SYNChronization:HOLDover:WAITing?, 5-37  
:SYNChronization:IMMediate, 5-38  
:SYNChronization:STATe?, 5-28  
:SYNChronization:TFOMerit?, 5-32  
:SYNChronization:TINTerval?, 5-32  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Command Index-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Index  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:<port>:BAUD, 5-101  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:<port>:BAUD?, 5-102  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:<port>:BITS?, 5-103  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:<port>:FDUPlex, 5-103  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:<port>:FDUPlex?, 5-104  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:<port>:PACE, 5-104  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:<port>:PACE?, 5-105  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:<port>:PARity, 5-105  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:<port>:PARity?, 5-106  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:<port>:PRESet, 5-110  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:<port>:SBITs?, 5-107  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial1:BITS, 5-102  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial1:SBITs, 5-106  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate?, 5-101  
:SYSTem:DATE?, 5-75  
:SYSTem:ERRor?, 5-42, 5-116  
:SYSTem:LANGuage?, 5-118  
:SYSTem:PRESet, 5-110  
:SYSTem:STATus:LENGth?, 5-41  
:SYSTem:STATus?, 5-41  
:SYSTem:TIME?, 5-75  
Command Index-4  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Index  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:IGNore:ALL,  
5-18  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:IGNore:  
COUNt?, 5-20  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:IGNore:NONE  
, 5-18  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:IGNore:  
STATe?, 5-21  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:IGNore?, 5-18  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:INCLude,  
5-19  
SYMBOLS  
*CLS, 5-54, 5-115  
*ESE, 5-66  
*ESE?, 5-67  
*ESR?, 5-67  
*IDN?, 5-114  
*SRE, 5-57  
*SRE?, 5-57  
*STB?, 5-58  
*TST?, 5-70  
:DIAGnostic:DOWNload, 5-115  
:DIAGnostic:ERASe, 5-115  
:DIAGnostic:ERASe?, 5-116  
:DIAGnostic:LIFetime:COUNt?, 5-71  
:DIAGnostic:LOG:CLEar, 5-45  
:DIAGnostic:LOG:CLEar <current log  
size>, 5-45  
:DIAGnostic:LOG:COUNt?, 5-46  
:DIAGnostic:LOG:READ:ALL?, 5-45  
:DIAGnostic:LOG:READ?, 5-46  
:DIAGnostic:LOG:READ? <entry  
number>, 5-47  
:DIAGnostic:QUERy:RESPonse?, 5-108  
:DIAGnostic:ROSCillator:EFControl:REL  
ative?, 5-28  
:DIAGnostic:TEST:RESult?, 5-72  
:DIAGnostic:TEST?, 5-71  
:FORMat:DATA, 5-93  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:INCLude:ALL,  
5-19  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:INClude:  
COUNt?, 5-20  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:INCLude:  
NONE, 5-19  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:INClude:  
STATe?, 5-21  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:INCLude?,  
5-19  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking?, 5-24  
:GPS:SATellite:VISible:PREDicted:  
COUNt?, 5-26  
:GPS:SATellite:VISible:PREDicted?, 5-25  
:LED:ALARm?, 5-56  
:LED:GPSLock?, 5-29  
:LED:HOLDover?, 5-29  
:PTIMe:DATE?, 5-75  
:PTIMe:LEAPsecond:ACCumulated?,  
5-79  
:PTIMe:LEAPsecond:DATE?, 5-80  
:PTIMe:LEAPsecond:DURation?, 5-81  
:PTIMe:LEAPsecond:STATe?, 5-82  
:PTIMe:PPS:EDGE, 5-78  
:PTIMe:PPS:EDGE?, 5-78  
:PTIMe:TIME:STRing?, 5-76  
:PTIMe:TIME?, 5-75  
:FORMat:DATA?, 5-93  
:GPS:INITial:DATE, 5-9  
:GPS:INITial:POSition, 5-10  
:GPS:INITial:TIME, 5-11  
:GPS:POSition, 5-12  
:GPS:POSition:ACTual?, 5-14  
:GPS:POSition:HOLD:LAST?, 5-14  
:GPS:POSition:HOLD:STATe?, 5-15  
:GPS:POSition:SURVey:PROGress?, 5-15  
:GPS:POSition:SURVey:STATe, 5-15  
:GPS:POSition:SURVey:STATe:POWerup  
, 5-16  
:PTIMe:TZONe, 5-77  
:PTIMe:TZONe?, 5-77  
:PULSe:CONTinuous:PERiod, 5-84  
:PULSe:CONTinuous:PERiod?, 5-84  
:PULSe:CONTinuous:STATe, 5-85  
:PULSe:CONTinuous:STATe?, 5-85  
:PULSe:REFerence:EDGE, 5-86  
:PULSe:REFerence:EDGE?, 5-86  
:PULSe:STARt:DATE, 5-87  
:PULSe:STARt:DATE?, 5-87  
:PULSe:STARt:TIME, 5-88  
:PULSe:STARt:TIME?, 5-88  
:SENSe:DATA:CLEar, 5-90  
:SENSe:DATA:CLEar <data set>, 5-91  
:GPS:POSition:SURVey:STATe:POWerup  
?, 5-16  
:GPS:POSition:SURVey:STATe?, 5-16  
:GPS:POSition?, 5-13  
:GPS:REFerence:ADELay, 5-22  
:GPS:REFerence:ADELay?, 5-23  
:GPS:REFerence:VALid?, 5-24  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:COUNt?, 5-25  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:EMANgle,  
5-17  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:EMANgle?,  
5-17  
:GPS:SATellite:TRACking:IGNore, 5-18  
Operating and Programming Guide  
General Index-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Index  
:SENSe:DATA:MEMory:OVERflow:COU  
Nt?, 5-97  
:SENSe:DATA:MEMory:OVERflow:COU  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:<port>:FDUPlex  
, 5-103  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:<port>:FDUPlex  
Nt? <data set>, 5-98  
?, 5-104  
:SENSe:DATA:MEMory:SAVE, 5-98  
:SENSe:DATA:MEMory:SAVE?, 5-99  
:SENSe:DATA:POINts?, 5-94  
:SENSe:DATA:POINts? <data set>, 5-94  
:SENSe:DATA:TSTamp?, 5-95  
:SENSe:DATA?, 5-92  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:<port>:PACE,  
5-104  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:<port>:PACE?,  
5-105  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:<port>:PARity,  
5-105  
:SENSe:TSTamp <channel>:EDGE, 5-90  
:SENSe:TSTamp <channel>:EDGE?, 5-90  
:STATus:<register>:CONDition?, 5-60  
:STATus:<register>:ENABle, 5-62  
:STATus:<register>:ENABle?, 5-63  
:STATus:<register>:EVENt?, 5-61  
:STATus:<register>:NTRansition, 5-64  
:STATus:<register>:NTRansition?, 5-65  
:STATus:<register>:PTRansition, 5-64  
:STATus:<register>:PTRansition?, 5-65  
:STATus:PRESet:ALARm, 5-55  
:STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition:  
USER, 5-68  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:<port>:PARity?,  
5-106  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:<port>:PRESet,  
5-110  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:<port>:SBITs?,  
5-107  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial1:BITS,  
5-102  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial1:SBITs,  
5-106  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate?, 5-101  
:SYSTem:DATE?, 5-75  
:SYSTem:ERRor?, 5-42, 5-116  
:SYSTem:LANGuage?, 5-118  
:SYSTem:PRESet, 5-110  
:SYSTem:STATus:LENGth?, 5-41  
:SYSTem:STATus?, 5-41  
:SYSTem:TIME?, 5-75  
:STATus:QUEStionable:EVENt:USER,  
5-69  
:SYNChronization:FFOMerit?, 5-30  
:SYNChronization:HOLDover:DURation:  
THReshold, 5-34  
:SYNChronization:HOLDover:DURation:  
THReshold:EXCeeded?, 5-35  
:SYNChronization:HOLDover:DURation:  
THReshold?, 5-34  
:SYNChronization:HOLDover:DURation?  
, 5-33  
:SYNChronization:HOLDover:INITiate,  
5-36  
:SYNChronization:HOLDover:RECovery:  
INITiate, 5-37  
:SYNChronization:HOLDover:RECovery:  
LIMit:IGNore, 5-38  
NUMERICS  
1 PPS, 1-4  
1 PPS error estimation, 5-31  
1 PPS output, 5-27  
1 PPS output quality, 4-7, 4-10, 5-27,  
5-28, 5-29, 5-30, 5-31, 5-32, 5-33, 5-34,  
5-35  
1 PPS polarity, 4-10, 5-78  
1 PPS reference edge, 4-10  
1 PPS reference synchronization, 4-7  
1 PPS output, 1-6  
1 PP2S connector (optional), 1-4  
1 PP2S output, 1-4  
1 PPS signal is locked to valid GPS  
reference, 5-24  
1 PPS signal is valid, 5-24  
10 MHz OUT, 1-4  
:SYNChronization:HOLDover:TUNCertai  
nty:PREDicted?, 5-31  
:SYNChronization:HOLDover:TUNCertai  
nty:PRESent?, 5-31  
:SYNChronization:HOLDover:WAITing?,  
5-37  
10 MHz output, 5-27  
:SYNChronization:IMMediate, 5-38  
:SYNChronization:STATe?, 5-28  
:SYNChronization:TFOMerit?, 5-32  
:SYNChronization:TINTerval?, 5-32  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:<port>:BAUD,  
5-101  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:<port>:BAUD?,  
5-102  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:<port>:BITS?,  
5-103  
10 MHz output quality, 4-7, 4-10, 5-27,  
5-28, 5-29, 5-30, 5-31, 5-32, 5-33, 5-34,  
5-35  
A
abbreviated commands, B-5  
ac power, 1-6  
ACQUISITION, 3-11, 3-14  
acquisition of satellites, 4-5, 4-6, 5-7, 5-8  
Alarm, 1-2, 1-4  
General Index-2  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Index  
alarm analysis, 4-8, 5-39, 5-40, 5-48, 5-49,  
5-50, 5-51, 5-52, 5-53, 5-54, 5-55, 5-56,  
5-57, 5-58, 5-59, 5-60, 5-61, 5-62, 5-63,  
5-64, 5-65, 5-66, 5-67, 5-68, 5-69  
Alarm BITE, 1-6  
alarm BITE, 4-8, 5-39, 5-48, 5-49, 5-50,  
5-51, 5-52, 5-53, 5-54, 5-56, 5-57, 5-58,  
5-59, 5-60, 5-61, 5-62, 5-63, 5-64, 5-65,  
5-66, 5-67, 5-68, 5-69  
errors, 4-8, 5-39, 5-42, 5-115  
clear time stamp memory, 5-89  
comma, B-4, B-6, B-9  
command  
abbreviated, B-5  
common, B-3  
format, 5-5  
parameter, B-5  
SCPI, B-3  
alarm clear, 4-8, 5-39, 5-54, 5-55, 5-56,  
5-57, 5-58  
Alarm condition, 1-2, 1-4, 1-5  
Alarm indicator, 1-6, 4-8, 5-39, 5-56  
Alarm LED, 1-3  
alarm relay, 4-8, 5-39, 5-48, 5-49, 5-50,  
5-51, 5-52, 5-53, 5-54, 5-55, 5-56, 5-57,  
5-58, 5-59, 5-60, 5-61, 5-62, 5-63, 5-64,  
5-65, 5-66, 5-67, 5-68, 5-69  
alarm setup, 4-8, 5-39, 5-48, 5-49, 5-50,  
5-51, 5-52, 5-53, 5-54, 5-56, 5-57, 5-58,  
5-59, 5-60, 5-61, 5-62, 5-63, 5-64, 5-65,  
5-66, 5-67, 5-68, 5-69  
syntax, B-2, B-5  
terminator, B-7  
terminators, B-4  
command error, 4-9, 5-40, 5-48, 5-53  
Command Error status, 5-48  
command syntax conventions, 4-4, 5-4  
commands  
introduction, 4-4  
Commands at a Glance, 4-16, 4-17  
commands summary, 4-16, 4-17  
common command  
syntax, B-4  
Common Command Format, B-3  
common commands  
alarm status, 5-50  
alarm test, 4-8, 5-39, 5-40, 5-68, 5-69,  
description, B-3  
5-70, 5-71, 5-72  
communication  
antenna  
delay values, 5-22  
antenna connection, 5-22  
ANTENNA connector, 1-4, 1-6  
antenna delay, 3-17  
serial interface port, 2-3, 2-4, 5-100,  
5-101, 5-103, 5-104, 5-105, 5-106  
compensating for antenna delay, 5-22  
configuration  
PORT 1, 2-11, 5-100  
antenna delay compensation, 4-6, 5-8  
antenna placement, 4-6, 5-8, 5-22  
ASCII Data, B-11  
PORT 2, 2-11, 5-100  
configuration factory-default  
values, 5-110  
azimuth angle, 3-15  
configuring PORT 1, 2-10, 4-13  
configuring PORT 2, 2-10, 4-13  
configuring serial interface port(s), 5-100  
configuring the RS-232C ports, 2-9  
conformance Information  
SCPI, 4-4  
connecting a computer, 2-5  
connecting a laptop, 2-6  
connecting a modem, 2-5, 2-6  
connecting a PC, 2-6  
connecting antenna system, 4-6, 5-8, 5-22  
conventions  
command syntax, 4-4, 5-4  
Coordinated Universal Time, 5-7  
CPU, 5-70  
B
baud, 2-9, 5-101, 5-102, 5-110  
baud rate, 2-9  
BINARY Data, 5-93, B-11  
Boolean, B-5  
C
C/N, 3-15  
cable delay compensation, 4-6, 5-8  
cables, 5-22  
crossover, 2-5  
HP 24542G interface, 2-6  
HP 24542U, 2-8  
HP 40242M interface, 2-6  
modem-eliminator, 2-5  
null-modem, 2-5  
carrier-to-noise ratio, 3-15  
characteristics  
58503B, E-2  
59551A, F-2  
clear, 5-90, 5-91  
alarm, 4-8, 5-39, 5-54  
crossover cable, 2-5  
current time, 4-10  
D
d.dEe, B-10  
d.dEe, ..., B-10  
d.dEed.dEe, B-10  
data, 5-92  
Operating and Programming Guide  
General Index-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Index  
data bits, 2-9, 5-102, 5-103, 5-110  
date and time outputs, 4-6, 4-10, 5-8  
DB-25 connector, 2-5  
DB-9 connector, 2-5  
dc power, 1-6  
DCE, 2-5  
dd, ..., B-10  
dddd, B-10  
decimal point, B-5, B-10  
defaults, factory settings, 2-9, 4-14, 5-110,  
5-111  
delay value, 5-22  
delay values, 5-22  
delay values, antenna cables, 4-6, 5-8  
diagnostic log, 4-8, 5-39, 5-43, 5-44, 5-45,  
5-46, 5-47  
diagnostic log messages, 5-43  
diagnostic tests, 4-9, 5-40, 5-70, 5-71, 5-72  
result, 5-72  
diagnostics  
internal self-test, 5-70  
documents  
list, B-12  
related, B-12  
download, 5-115  
downloading  
Using SatStat, C-2  
downloading new firmware, C-2  
DTE, 2-5  
F
factory default settings, 2-9, 4-14, 5-109,  
5-110  
failure protection, satellite loss, 4-7, 5-27,  
5-33, 5-34, 5-35  
FFOM, 4-7, 5-30  
FFOM value, 3-14  
Figure  
command list, 4-16, 4-17  
factory instrument settings, 5-111  
factory serial port settings, 5-111  
status reporting system, 5-49  
figure of merit, 5-30, 5-32, 5-74  
firmware error, A-5  
firmware installation, 2-3, 4-15, 5-113,  
5-115, 5-116, 5-117, 5-118  
firmware revision code, 2-3, 4-15, 5-114  
firmware upgrade, 2-3, 5-115  
flash EEPROM, 5-115  
flow control state, 5-104, 5-105  
format  
ASCii, 5-93  
INTeger, 5-93  
FPGA logic, 5-70  
front panel  
59551A, 1-5  
PORT 2, 2-4  
full duplex, 2-9, 5-104, 5-110  
G
duplex state, 5-103, 5-104  
GPS engine, 5-70  
E
GPS Lock, 1-2  
echoing of the characters you type, 5-103,  
5-104, 5-110  
GPS lock, 4-5, 4-6, 5-7, 5-33, 5-34, 5-35  
GPS Lock indicator, 4-7, 5-29  
GPS Lock LED, 1-3, 1-5  
GPS position, 4-5, 5-7, 5-13, 5-14, 5-15  
GPS satellite acquisition, 4-5, 4-6, 5-7,  
5-33, 5-34, 5-35  
EEPROM, 5-70, 5-115  
elevation angle, 3-15  
elevation mask angle, 3-15  
EPROM, 5-70  
erasing  
EEPROM, 5-116  
error  
GPS time, 3-16  
GPS timeline, 5-73  
H
hardware/firmware, A-5  
Hardware status, 5-48, 5-51, 5-60, 5-61,  
5-62, 5-63, 5-64, 5-65  
hardware/firmware error, A-5  
HEALTH MONITOR, 3-11  
health monitor screen, 3-11  
Hold position mode, 3-17  
Holdover, 1-2, 3-12  
query, A-5  
semantic, A-5  
syntactic, A-4  
error analysis, 4-8, 5-39, 5-40, 5-42, 5-116  
error behavior, A-6  
error log, 4-8, 5-39, 5-40, 5-42, 5-116  
error messages, 4-8, 5-39, A-7  
error queue, 4-8, 5-39, 5-42, 5-116, A-3  
error recovery, serial port, 4-8, 4-13, 5-39,  
5-108  
error types, A-4  
error, command, 5-48, 5-53  
error, reading, A-2  
holdover  
process, 5-27  
recovery, 5-27, 5-37  
status, 5-48, 5-52  
tutorial, 3-8  
Holdover indicator, 4-7, 5-29  
Holdover LED, 1-3, 1-5  
holdover loss of satellites, 4-7  
General Index-4  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Index  
holdover mode, 1-2, 1-5  
holdover operation, 3-8  
holdover recovery, 4-7, 5-37  
holdover status, 4-9  
interface RS-232C, 2-3  
internal reference oscillator, 5-7, 5-27  
internal self-test diagnostics, 5-70  
interpolators, 5-70  
holdover threshold, 3-14  
How to use the Status Screen, 3-3  
58518A/519A cable, 5-22  
58518AA/519AA cable, 5-22  
58520A/521A cable, 5-23  
58520AA/521AA cable, 5-23  
59551A Receiver, 1-6  
SatStat, 3-3, C-2  
SmartClock, 3-11  
HP 24542G interface cable, 2-6  
HP 24542U cable, 2-8  
HP 40242M interface cable, 2-6  
introduction commands, 4-4  
IRIG-B output, 1-6  
K
keyword  
separator, B-5  
L
latitude, 4-5, 5-7, 5-12, 5-13, 5-14  
leap second, 4-10  
leap second status, 5-73  
LED  
Alarm, 1-2, 1-3, 1-5, 1-6, 4-8, 5-39  
GPS Lock, 1-2, 1-3, 1-5, 4-7  
Holdover, 1-3, 1-5, 4-7  
Power, 1-2, 1-3, 1-5  
I
I/O  
PORT 1, 59551A, 1-6  
PORT 2, 59551A, 1-5  
I/O PORT 1, 4-13  
identification of Receiver, 4-15, 5-114  
IEEE Standard 488.2  
obtaining copy of standard, B-12  
IEEE 488.2  
description, B-3  
syntax, B-4  
In This Guide, 1-ix  
indicator  
lifetime count, 5-71  
list of  
commands, 4-16, 4-17  
configuration factory-default  
values, 5-110  
error messages, A-7  
error types, A-4  
factory-default values, 5-110  
response format, B-10  
system preset, 5-111  
literal, B-5  
local time, 4-10  
local time zone, 3-16  
Alarm, 1-2, 1-5, 1-6  
GPS Lock, 1-2, 1-5  
Holdover, 1-2, 1-5  
Power, 1-2, 1-5  
locking to GPS satellites, 4-5, 4-6, 5-7,  
5-8, 5-9, 5-10, 5-11, 5-12, 5-13, 5-14, 5-15,  
5-16, 5-17, 5-18, 5-19, 5-20, 5-21, 5-22,  
5-23, 5-24, 5-25, 5-26, 5-33, 5-34, 5-35,  
5-36, 5-37, 5-38, 5-39  
log, diagnostic, 4-8, 5-39, 5-43, 5-44, 5-45,  
5-46, 5-47  
log, error, 4-8, 5-39, 5-40, 5-42, 5-116  
longitude, 4-5, 5-7, 5-12, 5-13, 5-14  
indicators  
Alarm, 1-3  
GPS Lock, 1-3  
Holdover, 1-3  
Power, 1-3  
initialization, 5-109  
initializing the Receiver, 4-14  
initiating manual Holdover, 5-27, 5-36  
input  
antenna, 1-6, 4-6, 5-8, 5-22  
Power, 1-4  
Time Tag, 1-6, 4-12  
input jack, 1-6  
inputs  
M
MAXimum, B-6  
memory overflow, 4-12, 5-89  
messages  
program, B-7  
response, B-9  
messages, error, A-7  
MINimum, B-6  
modem-eliminator cable, 2-5  
multipliers, B-7  
Time tag, 1-6  
install  
firmware, 2-3, 4-15, 5-113, 5-115  
Receiver, 5-9, 5-17, 5-22  
install firmware, 5-115  
INSTALL language, 5-115, 5-117  
installation, 4-15  
N
new line, B-11  
not tracking., 3-14  
Operating and Programming Guide  
General Index-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Index  
NRf, B-5  
null-modem cable, 2-5  
PORT 2, 1-5, 4-13, 5-100, 5-101, 5-102,  
5-103, 5-104, 5-105, 5-106, 5-107, 5-110  
factory-default values, 2-9  
PORT 2 configuration, 2-11  
PORT 2 front panel, 2-4  
Position, 3-17  
position, 4-5, 5-7, 5-12, 5-13, 5-14, 5-15  
position at powerup, 5-16  
position hold, 5-15  
Power, 1-2  
power  
ac, 1-6  
dc, 1-6  
POWER input, 1-4  
power input jack, 1-6  
Power input jack, 58503A, 1-4  
Power LED, 1-3, 1-5  
power outages, 5-89  
power supply, 1-6  
Power supply levels, 5-70  
power surges, 5-89  
Powerup status, 5-48, 5-52  
predicted visible satellites, 5-25  
preface, 1-ix  
preset, 5-109  
preset to factory defaults, 2-9, 4-14, 5-109,  
5-110  
O
OHM, B-6  
Operation status, 5-39, 5-48, 5-50, 5-60,  
5-61, 5-62, 5-63, 5-64, 5-65  
operational verification, D-2  
output  
1 PPS, 1-4, 1-6, 4-7, 4-10, 5-27, 5-28,  
5-29, 5-30, 5-31, 5-32, 5-33, 5-34, 5-35,  
5-78  
10 MHz, 4-7, 4-10, 5-27, 5-28, 5-29,  
5-30, 5-31, 5-32, 5-33, 5-34, 5-35  
10 MHz OUT, 1-4  
Alarm, 1-4  
alarm, 4-7  
Alarm BITE, 1-6  
IRIG-B, 1-6  
Programmable Pulse, 1-6, 4-11, 5-83,  
5-84, 5-85, 5-86, 5-87, 5-88  
synchronization, 5-28, 5-29, 5-30, 5-31,  
5-32, 5-33, 5-34, 5-35  
output pulse, 4-11, 5-83, 5-84, 5-85, 5-86,  
5-87, 5-88  
output synchronization, 4-7  
outputs  
1 PP2S (optional), 1-4  
1 PPS, 1-6  
IRIG-B, 1-6  
product identification, 4-15, 5-114  
program messages  
definition, B-7  
syntax, B-7  
Programmable Pulse, 1-6  
programmable pulse, 4-11, 5-83, 5-84,  
5-85, 5-86, 5-87, 5-88  
Programmable Pulse output, 1-6  
pseudorandom noise, 3-15  
pulse generator, 4-11, 5-83, 5-84, 5-85,  
5-86, 5-87, 5-88  
P
pace, 2-9, 5-104, 5-105, 5-110  
pacing, 5-110  
parameter separator, B-6  
parameter types, B-5  
Boolean, B-5  
pulse output, 4-11, 5-83, 5-84, 5-85, 5-86,  
5-87, 5-88  
literal, B-5  
string, B-5  
parity, 2-9, 5-105, 5-106, 5-110  
performance tests, D-2  
pin assignment  
PORT 1, 2-3  
PORT 2, 2-4  
polarity of edges  
Q
QSPI, 5-70  
quality  
FFOM, 3-14  
signal, 3-13, 3-14  
TFOM, 3-13  
1 PPS, 4-10, 5-78  
query, B-6, B-9  
query error, A-5  
query parameters  
<numeric value>, B-6  
MAXimum, B-6  
programmable pulse, 4-11  
time stamp, 4-12, 5-89, 5-90  
PORT, 1-6  
PORT 1, 2-6, 4-13, 5-100, 5-101, 5-102,  
5-103, 5-104, 5-105, 5-106, 5-107, 5-110  
factory-default values, 2-9  
PORT 1 configuration, 2-11  
PORT 1 rear panel, 2-3  
PORT 1, 58503B, 1-4  
MINimum, B-6  
querying instrument identification, 5-113  
Questionable status, 5-48, 5-52  
queue overflows, A-3  
queue, error, 4-8, 5-39, 5-116  
General Index-6  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Index  
quick reference  
satellite tracking at installation, 4-5, 5-7,  
5-9  
command list, 4-16, 4-17  
factory instrument settings, 5-111  
factory serial port settings, 5-110  
status reporting system, 4-18  
SCPI, B-2  
description, B-3  
version, 4-4  
SCPI Command and Query Format, B-3  
SCPI conformance Information, 4-4  
SCPI standard, B-12  
Self Test, 3-18  
self test, 4-9, 5-40, 5-70, 5-71, 5-72  
semantic error, A-5  
separator  
R
RAM, 5-70  
rear panel  
58503A, 1-4  
59551A, 1-6  
PORT 1, 2-3  
Receiver Commands at a Glance, 4-16,  
4-17  
keyword, B-5  
parameter, B-6  
Receiver identification, 4-15, 5-113, 5-114  
Receiver initialization, 4-14  
Receiver Status Screen, 3-3  
Receiver status screen, 5-41  
recovering from holdover, 4-7, 5-27, 5-37  
recovering the last query response, 4-13,  
5-100  
serial interface, 1-4, 1-5, 1-6  
serial interface communication, 4-13  
serial interface port, 2-3, 2-4  
preset, 5-109  
serial number, 5-114  
serial port error recovery, 4-8, 4-13, 5-39,  
5-108  
serial port I/O, 4-13, 5-110  
serial port settings, 2-11  
setting up the Receiver, 4-15, 5-9, 5-17  
settings, serial port, 2-11  
signal  
quality, 3-13, 3-14  
signal loss, 4-7, 5-27, 5-33, 5-34, 5-35,  
5-36, 5-37, 5-38  
signal strength, 3-15  
SmartClock Mode, 3-12  
SmartClock PLL, 3-14  
software pacing, 2-9  
Recovery, 3-12  
Reference oscillator, 5-70  
related ocumentation, B-12  
relay, alarm, 4-8, 5-39, 5-48, 5-49, 5-50,  
5-51, 5-52, 5-53, 5-54, 5-55, 5-56, 5-57,  
5-58, 5-59, 5-60, 5-61, 5-62, 5-63, 5-64,  
5-65, 5-66, 5-67, 5-68, 5-69  
removes error from error queue, 5-116  
reset to factory defaults, 2-9, 4-14, 5-109,  
5-110  
response message syntax, B-9  
response messages, B-9  
data types, B-10  
restore to factory defaults, 2-9, 4-14,  
5-109, 5-110  
specifications  
58503B, E-2  
59551A, F-2  
SS, 3-15  
status  
revision code, 4-15, 5-114  
RS-232C, 1-4, 1-5, 1-6  
RS-232C interface, 4-13, 5-100, 5-101,  
5-102, 5-103, 5-104, 5-105, 5-106, 5-107  
RS-232C ports, 2-3  
alarm, 5-50, 5-56  
command error, 5-53, 5-66  
hardware, 5-51, 5-60, 5-61, 5-62, 5-63,  
5-64, 5-65  
holdover, 5-52, 5-60, 5-61, 5-62, 5-63,  
5-64, 5-65  
operation, 5-50, 5-60, 5-61, 5-62, 5-63,  
5-64, 5-65  
powerup, 5-52, 5-60, 5-61, 5-62, 5-63,  
5-64, 5-65  
questionable, 5-52, 5-60, 5-61, 5-62,  
5-63, 5-64, 5-65, 5-68  
S
satellite acquisition, 4-5, 4-6, 5-7, 5-33,  
5-34, 5-35  
satellite failure protection, 4-7, 5-27, 5-33,  
5-34, 5-35  
satellite loss, 4-7, 5-33, 5-34, 5-35  
satellite management, 4-5, 4-6, 5-7, 5-9,  
5-10, 5-11, 5-12, 5-13, 5-14, 5-15, 5-16,  
5-17, 5-18, 5-19, 5-20, 5-21, 5-22, 5-23,  
5-24, 5-25, 5-26, 5-33, 5-34, 5-35, 5-36,  
5-37, 5-38, 5-39  
satellite reacquisition, 4-7  
satellite selection, 4-6, 5-7  
Satellite Status, 3-14  
status information, 5-39  
status registers, 5-48  
status reporting, 4-8, 4-9, 5-39, 5-40, 5-48,  
5-49, 5-50, 5-51, 5-52, 5-53, 5-54, 5-56,  
5-57, 5-58, 5-59, 5-60, 5-61, 5-62, 5-63,  
5-64, 5-65, 5-66, 5-67, 5-68, 5-69  
Operating and Programming Guide  
General Index-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Index  
status reporting system, 5-48  
Status Reporting System Diagram, 5-49  
status screen, 4-8, 5-41  
status/alarm reporting system, 5-48  
stop bits, 2-9, 5-106, 5-107, 5-110  
strength of the signal, 3-15  
string, B-5  
time tag, 4-12, 5-89, 5-90, 5-91, 5-92, 5-93,  
5-94, 5-95, 5-96, 5-97, 5-98, 5-99  
Time Tag inputs, 4-12  
Time tag inputs, 1-6  
time transfer information, 5-7  
time zone setting, 4-10, 5-73, 5-77  
Time-stamped Edge, 4-12, 5-90  
time-stamped edge, 5-90  
subsystem command  
syntax, B-4  
timing outputs, 4-7, 5-28, 5-29, 5-30, 5-31,  
suffix  
5-32, 5-33, 5-34, 5-35  
elements, B-6  
multipliers, B-7  
timing shift, 3-14  
tutorial, 3-3  
suffix, multiplier, B-7  
suffixes, B-6  
summary  
commands, 4-16, 4-17  
survey mode, 5-15  
Survey position mode, 3-17  
SYNCHRONIZATION, 3-11  
synchronization of output signals, 4-7,  
5-28, 5-29, 5-30, 5-31, 5-32, 5-33, 5-34,  
5-35  
synchronizing to reference, 4-7, 5-27  
syntactic error, A-4  
syntax, 4-4, 5-4  
using the Status Screen, 3-3  
U
UART, 5-70  
units, B-6  
upgrading firmware, 2-3, 4-15, 5-113  
UTC, 5-7  
UTC time, 3-16  
UTC timeline, 5-73  
V
visible satellites, 5-25  
W
Windows program  
Receiver Status screen, C-2  
program messages, B-7  
response messages, B-9  
syntax, SCPI, B-2  
X
SYSTEM  
XON, 5-104  
XYZ, B-11  
STATUS? query, 3-3  
system preset, 5-111  
system time, 4-10, 5-73  
T
Table  
command list, 4-16, 4-17  
factory instrument settings, 5-110,  
5-111  
factory serial port settings, 5-110  
status reporting system, 5-49  
terminator  
command, B-7  
test record, D-2  
test result, 5-72  
TFOM, 4-7, 5-32, 5-74  
TFOM value, 3-13  
time and date outputs, 4-6, 4-10, 5-8,  
5-73, 5-74, 5-75, 5-76, 5-77  
time of day outputs, 4-6, 4-10, 5-8, 5-73,  
5-74, 5-75, 5-76, 5-77  
Time Stamp memory, 4-12  
time stamp polarity, 4-12, 5-89, 5-90  
time stamping, 4-12, 5-89, 5-90, 5-91,  
5-92, 5-93, 5-94, 5-95, 5-96, 5-97, 5-98,  
5-99  
General Index-8  
Operating and Programming Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Sennheiser Microphone MMD 935 User Manual
Sharp PDAs Smartphones YO P5B User Manual
Sony DVD VCR Combo SLV D360P User Manual
Sony Security Camera SNC RH124 User Manual
Sony Speaker System SRS BTV5 User Manual
Sony Stereo Amplifier XM 2200GTX User Manual
Sony Stereo Amplifier XM ZR602 User Manual
StarTechcom Laptop Docking Station SATDOCK4U2E User Manual
Sterling Plumbing Musical Table scc2 User Manual
Sylvania VCR 6240VC1 User Manual